Mazda B2300 Truck Owners Manual No Job Name
Mazda-2006-Mazda-B2300-Truck-Owners-Manual-817760 mazda-2006-mazda-b2300-truck-owners-manual-817760
Mazda-4Wd-Users-Manual-371578 mazda-4wd-users-manual-371578
4WD to the manual ce215ff5-edae-d3a4-6568-9aef70791042
2015-06-15
: Mazda Mazda-B2300-Truck-Owners-Manual-747174 mazda-b2300-truck-owners-manual-747174 mazda pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 268
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 6 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Table of Contents Introduction Instrument Cluster 4 12 Warning and control lights Gauges 12 16 Entertainment Systems 19 AM/FM stereo AM/FM Stereo single CD/MP3 system AM/FM Stereo cassette, CD/MP3 sound system In-dash CD6/MP3 disc Premium Pioneer audio system Climate Controls Heater only Manual heating and air conditioning Lights Headlamps Turn signal control Bulb replacement Driver Controls Windshield wiper/washer control Steering wheel adjustment Power windows Mirrors Speed control 19 21 24 28 33 33 34 36 36 39 40 47 47 47 49 50 50 Locks and Security 56 Keys Locks Anti-theft system 56 56 60 Seating and Safety Restraints Seating Safety restraints 63 63 65 1 PAGE: 1 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 6 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 2 SESS: 8 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Table of Contents Airbags Child restraints Tires, Wheels and Loading Tire Information Tire Inflation Vehicle loading Trailer towing Recreational towing Driving 77 89 105 108 109 122 129 139 141 Starting Brakes Transmission operation 141 145 149 Roadside Emergencies 162 Hazard flasher switch Fuel pump shut-off switch Fuses and relays Changing tires Lug Nut Torque Overheating Jump starting Wrecker towing 162 162 163 173 181 182 183 188 Customer Assistance 189 Cleaning 202 Maintenance and Specifications 208 Engine compartment Engine oil Battery Engine Coolant Fuel information Refill capacities Lubricant specifications Engine data 218 222 228 230 236 253 256 257 2 PAGE: 2 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 8 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 3 SESS: 10 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Table of Contents Accessories 262 Index 263 All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from MNAO. MNAO may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation. Copyright © 2005 MNAO 3 PAGE: 3 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 10 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 4 SESS: 12 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Introduction CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning CIMS #517043 com_calif-warning itdseq=1 WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. CONGRATULATIONS CIMS #869811 com_preface.mazda itdseq=2 Congratulations on acquiring your new Mazda product. Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it. For more information on Mazda and its products visit the following website: • In the United States: www.mazdausa.com • In Canada: www.mazda.ca Additional owner information is given in separate publications. This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available. Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle. WARNING: In the event of an accident the Fuel pump shut-off switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g. collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter. 4 PAGE: 4 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 12 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 5 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Introduction SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION CIMS #729502 com_environ-info Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by a bold WARNING statement. These comments should be read and observed. Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol, it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before touching or attempting adjustment of any kind. Protecting the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol. Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids. BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE There are no particular breaking-in rules for your vehicle. During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is necessary to give the moving parts a chance to break in. SPECIAL NOTICES CIMS #958891 com_handbook-warn.mazda itdseq=4 Emission warranty The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper to Bumper Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage and Corrosion Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide. itdseq=3 art=expii001_b CIMS #958892 com_warns-on-vehicle.mazda itdseq=5 art=ctoss542_a CIMS #1123266 com_environ-protect.mazda itdseq=6 art=expii002_b CIMS #689351 com_breaking_veh.j14 itdseq=7 CIMS #729514 com_special-note-title itdseq=8 CIMS #689352 com_emission-warning.j14 itdseq=9 5 PAGE: 5 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 6 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Introduction Event Data Recorder The computer in your vehicle is capable of recording detailed data potentially including but not limited to information such as: • the use of restraint systems including seat belts by the driver and passengers, • information about the performance of various systems and modules in the vehicle, and • information related to engine, throttle, steering, brake or other system status potentially including information related to how the driver operates the vehicle including but not limited to vehicle speed. This information may be stored during regular operation or in a crash or near crash event. This stored information may be read out and used by: • service and repair facilities. • law enforcement or government agencies. • the Manufacturer and Distributor. CIMS #1138947 com_edr-warning.mazda itdseq=10 Special instructions For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls. CIMS #1066766 com_elec-cntrls.non-euro itdseq=11 WARNING: Please read the section Supplemental restraint system (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury. WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag. Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles CIMS #80196 com_utility-notice itdseq=12 WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death. Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter. 6 PAGE: 6 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 7 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Introduction CIMS #1319986 com_snowplowing.mazda itdseq=13 Using your vehicle with a snowplow WARNING: Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing. Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package. CIMS #1123276 com_using-ambulance.mazda itdseq=14 Using your vehicle as an ambulance WARNING: Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance. Your vehicle is not equipped with an ambulance preparation package. CIMS #1063876 com_wcr-symbols.mbs itdseq=15 7 PAGE: 7 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 8 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Introduction These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide Protecting the Environment Fasten Safety Belt Airbag - Front Airbag - Side Child Seat Child Seat Installation Warning Child Seat Lower Anchor Child Seat Tether Anchor Brake System Anti-Lock Brake System Brake Fluid Non-Petroleum Based Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe Windshield Defrost/Demist Rear Window Defrost/Demist Power Windows 8 PAGE: 8 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 9 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Introduction Vehicle Symbol Glossary Power Window Lockout Personal Alarm System Feature Engine Oil Engine Coolant Engine Coolant Temperature Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking, Flames, or Sparks Battery Acid Explosive Gas Fan Warning Power Steering Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid Level MAX MIN Emission System Engine Air Filter Passenger Compartment Air Filter Jack Check fuel cap Powertrain Malfunction Speed Control INFORMATION ABOUT THIS GUIDE The information found in this guide was accurate at the time of printing. Mazda may change the contents without notice. CIMS #604091 com_info_guide.j14 itdseq=16 9 PAGE: 9 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 10 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Instrument Cluster CIMS #1282361 mbs_ipanelleft.fus itdseq=17 art=mbsip1_a Instrument panel dimmer control (pg. 37) Instrument cluster (pg. 12) Headlamp control (pg. 36) Turn signal and wiper/washer control (pg. 47) Driver air bag (pg. 77) * If equipped Parking brake release (pg. 147) Speed control* (pg. 50) Hood release (pg. 217) 10 PAGE: 10 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 11 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Instrument Cluster CIMS #953683 mbs_ipanelright.fus itdseq=18 art=mbsip2_a 4wd control* (pg. 156) Audio system (pg. 19) Auxiliary power point* (pg. 48) Fog lamp control* (pg. 37) Cigar lighter* (pg. 49) Passenger air bag deactivate switch (pg. 84) Climate control system (pg. 33) * if equipped 11 PAGE: 11 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 12 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES CIMS #1264223 com_warn-lights.mbs04 itdseq=19 art=mbsis302_b Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions. Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the respective system warning light for additional information. Check engine: The Check Engine indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the ON position to check the bulb. Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. art=expis315_a WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire. 12 PAGE: 12 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 13 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Instrument Cluster Check fuel cap: Illuminates when the fuel cap may not be properly installed. Check the fuel filler cap if this light remains on. Continued driving with this light on may cause the Check Engine warning light to come on. art=dnois308_a It may take a long period of time for the system to detect an improperly installed or properly re-installed fuel filler cap depending on driving and fuel tank level conditions. Refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. Brake system warning light: To ! P confirm the brake system warning light is functional, it will BRAKE momentarily illuminate when the ignition is turned to the ON position when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START, or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a failure to brake proportioning and the brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer. art=dnogf004_a WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle checked by checked by your authorized dealer. Anti-lock brake system: If the ABS light stays illuminated or ABS continues to flash, a malfunction has been detected; have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated. art=dnogf001_a 13 PAGE: 13 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 14 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Instrument Cluster Airbag readiness: If this light fails to illuminate when ignition is turned to ON, continues to flash or remains on, have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been detected. Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten your safety belt. A chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt. Refer to the Seating and safety restraints chapter. Charging system: Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. Engine oil pressure: Illuminates when the oil pressure falls below the normal range, refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. Engine coolant temperature: Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible , switch off the engine and let cool. Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. art=ranis319_a art=exdis014_a art=expis017_a art=dnois006_a art=f12ip034_a WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. Low fuel: Illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at or near empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter). Door ajar: Illuminates when the ignition is in the ON position and any door is open. art=dnois002_a art=cgris311_a 14 PAGE: 14 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 15 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Instrument Cluster Overdrive off (if equipped): O/D Illuminates when the overdrive OFF function of the transmission has been turned off, refer to the Driving chapter. If the light does not come on or the light flashes steadily, have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, damage to the transmission could occur. Four wheel drive low (if 4x4 equipped): Illuminates when LOW four-wheel drive low is engaged. NOTE: If the light continues to flash have the system serviced. Four wheel drive high (if 4x4 equipped): Illuminates when four-wheel drive high is engaged. It may also illuminate when the 4WD LOW is engaged, refer to the Driving chapter for more information. NOTE: If the light continues to flash have the system serviced. Anti-theft system: Flashes when the Securilocky Passive Anti-theft System has been activated. art=expis024_a art=expis340_a art=f12ip031_a art=ranis348_a Speed control: Illuminates when the speed control is engaged. Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged. art=dewis310_a Turn signal: Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard lights are turned on. If the indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb. High beams: Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on. art=exdis005_a art=expis021_a Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door is opened. 15 PAGE: 15 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 16 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Instrument Cluster Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the driver’s door is opened. Door ajar warning chime: Sounds when any door is opened (or not fully closed). GAUGES CIMS #1264222 com_gauges.mbs04 itdseq=20 art=mbsis304_b Speedometer: Indicates the current vehicle speed. Engine coolant temperature gauge: Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature, the needle will be in the normal range (between “H” and “C”). If it enters the red section, the engine is overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool. art=ranis341_a art=ranis343_a Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and specifications chapter. 16 PAGE: 16 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 17 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Instrument Cluster WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap and/or the radiator cap while the engine is running or hot, this may result in serious burns. Odometer: Registers the total miles (kilometers) of the vehicle. art=ranis345_b Trip odometer: Registers the miles (kilometers) of individual journeys. Press the button once until “TRIP” appears in the display (this represents the trip mode). To reset the trip, press and hold the control again for approximately 2 seconds, until the trip reading is 0.0 miles (kilometers). To toggle between trip and odometer, press and release the control. Tachometer: Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine. art=ranis346_b art=ranis344_a Fuel gauge: Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank (when the ignition is in the ON position). The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade. Proper gauge indication requires the ignition to be in the OFF or ACCESSORY position during refueling, otherwise correct fuel indication after refueling can be slow to update. Also, a minimum of 3 gallons is needed for correct indication after refueling. art=ranis342_a NOTE: The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located. 17 PAGE: 17 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 18 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Instrument Cluster Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information. 18 PAGE: 18 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 19 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Entertainment Systems CIMS #1486771 com_audio-title.06 itdseq=21 CIMS #1239876 com_pionamfm.ran itdseq=22 AUDIO SYSTEMS AM/FM stereo (if equipped) art=rancf807_b Your radio is equipped with a special display feature. This allows you to select what will appear in the display. You may select Clock mode, which displays the time, or Frequency mode, which displays the current radio frequency. If clock mode is selected and a radio function is pressed (i.e, SEEK, TUNE, Memory Presets), the radio information will display momentarily and then again display the time. 1. AM/FM: Press to select AM/FM1/FM2 frequency bands. 2. CLK —To set the time: Ensure that your audio system is turned off. Press and hold CLK until the hours flash in the display. Press AUDIO to adjust the hours. Press and hold CLK again until the minutes flash. Press AUDIO to adjust the minutes. To set the display mode: Press repeatedly to toggle between Clock mode and frequency mode. art=rancf831_a art=rancf832_a 19 PAGE: 19 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 20 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Entertainment Systems 3. AUDIO: Press AUDIO repeatedly to toggle through the following modes and use / to make adjustments in those modes. Bass: Press Treble: Press Balance: Press right speakers. Hours: Press Minute: Press AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO art=rancf830_a to decrease/increase the bass setting. to decrease/increase the treble setting. to adjust the audio between the left and to decrease/increase the hours. to decrease/increase the minutes. 4. Tune: Press to manually go down/up ( / ) the radio frequency and in audio mode to select various settings. 5. Memory presets: To set a station: Select frequency band AM/FM; tune to a station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns. To tune a preset station, press the desired memory preset. SEEK to 6. SEEK: Press access the previous or next radio station. If pressed for less than .5 seconds, the system will seek to the next or previous station. 7. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn the system ON/OFF. Turn to adjust the volume levels. If the volume is set above a certain level, and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back to a “nominal” listening level when the ignition is turned back on. art=221cf840_a art=221cf837_a art=221cf841_a 20 PAGE: 20 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 21 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Entertainment Systems CIMS #1296341 com_scdpio.mbs04 itdseq=23 AM/FM stereo single CD/MP3 system art=rancf806_c 1. CD eject: Press to eject the CD. art=rancf827_b 2. CLK (Clock): Press CLK until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINUTE is displayed. Press MENU to adjust the hours/minutes. Press CLK to display the time when the ignition is off. 3. MUTE: Press to mute the playing media. Press again to return to the playing media. art=rancf833_a art=rancf834_a 4. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly to toggle through the following modes and use / to make adjustment in those modes. art=rancf838_a 21 PAGE: 21 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 22 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Entertainment Systems Autoset: Press MENU to set the strongest local radio stations for AM/FM1/FM2 without losing your original manually set preset stations. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system will store the last one in the remaining presets. Bass: Press Treble: Press Balance: Press right speakers. MENU MENU MENU art=rancf835_a to decrease/increase the bass setting. to decrease/increase the treble setting. to adjust the audio between the left and MENU to adjust the audio between the front and Fade: Press rear speakers. 5. TUNE : Press to manually go / ) the radio down/up ( frequency and also to select various settings in menu mode. 6. SHUFF (Shuffle): Press to play the tracks on the current CD in random order. 7. REPEAT: Press to repeat the current CD track. 8. FF (Fast forward): Press to manually advance in a CD track. 9. REW (Rewind): Press to manually reverse in a CD track. art=rancf835_a art=rancf845_a art=221cf806_a art=221cf805_a REW 1 10. Memory presets: To set a station: Select frequency band AM/FM; tune to a station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns. To recall a previously set station, press the desired memory preset button briefly. 11. SEEK/TRACK: Press to access the next/previous strong station. In CD mode, press to advance to the next/previous track. art=rancf828_b art=rancf839_a 22 PAGE: 22 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 23 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Entertainment Systems 12. SCAN: Press to toggle between SCAN ON and SCAN OFF. When activated, the system scans up through and plays a brief sampling of available radio stations or CD tracks. Press again to stop. 13. AM/FM: Press to select AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band. 14. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease volume. If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on. 15. CD: Press to enter CD mode. If a CD is already present in the system, the disc will begin to play. 16. CD slot: Insert a CD label side up. art=221cf812_a art=rancf842_a art=221cf819_a art=rancf837_a art=221cf823_a CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Mazda CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information. 23 PAGE: 23 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 24 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Entertainment Systems AM/FM stereo cassette, CD/MP3 sound system CIMS #1296342 com_dmpio.mbs04 itdseq=24 art=rancf805_c 1. CD eject: Press to eject the CD. 2. CLK (Clock): Press CLK until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINUTE is displayed. Press MENU to adjust the hours/minutes. Press CLK to display the time of day when the ignition is off. 3. MUTE: Press to mute the playing media. Press again to return to the playing media. 4. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly to toggle through the following / to make modes and use adjustment in those modes. art=rancf827_b art=rancf833_a art=rancf834_a art=rancf838_a 24 PAGE: 24 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 25 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Entertainment Systems Autoset: Press MENU to access the autoset setting. Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original MENU to manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2 . Use set. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system will store the last one in the remaining presets. Press again to disengage. Bass: Press Treble: Press Balance: Press right speakers. Fade: Press rear speakers. MENU MENU MENU MENU art=rancf835_a to decrease/increase the level of bass. to decrease/increase the level of treble. to adjust the audio between the left and to adjust the audio between the front and Next/previous directory: In MP3 mode, press the previous or next MP3 directory. Flat file/directory mode: Press or Directory mode. MENU MENU to go to to select Flat file mode Track number/music name/file name: In MP3 mode, press MENU to view by track number, music name or file name. Dolbyt noise reduction: Reduces tape noise and hiss. Dolby: Press MENU to cycle Dolby ON/OFF. The Dolbyt noise reduction system is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolbyt and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolbyt Laboratories Licensing Corporation. 5. TUNE: Press to manually go / ) the radio down/up ( frequency and also to select various settings in menu mode. 6. Tape eject: Press to eject the tape. art=rancf835_a art=rancf827_b 25 PAGE: 25 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 26 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Entertainment Systems 7. Tape 1–2: Press to change playing sides of the tape. 8. TEXT: In MP3 mode, press to view the next 12 characters in the MP3 Music name/file name of the current MP3 track and directory. 9. SHUFF (Shuffle): In CD or MP3 mode, press to play the tracks on the current CD/MP3 in random order. In MP3 directory mode, press to play the tracks within the current directory in random order. 10. REPEAT: Press to repeat the current CD/MP3 track. 11. FF (Fast forward): In tape mode, press to fast forward the tape. In CD mode, press to manually advance in a CD track. 12. REW (Rewind): In tape mode, REW 1 press to rewind the tape. In CD mode, press to manually reverse in a CD track. 13. Memory presets: To set a station: Select frequency band AM/FM; tune to a station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns. To select a preset station, press the desired memory preset button. 14. AM/FM: Press to select AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band. / to access the 15. SEEK/TRACK: In radio mode, press next/previous strong station. In CD and MP3 flat file mode, press to access the next track. In MP3 directory mode, press to select the next/previous track in the current directory. 16. Scan: In radio mode, scan through the available stations. In tape mode, you may set SCAN on or off. If activated, the player will scan the tape and plays a art=221cf826_b art=221cf809_a art=rancf845_a art=221cf806_a art=221cf805_a art=rancf828_b art=rancf824_a art=rancf825_a art=221cf812_a 26 PAGE: 26 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 27 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Entertainment Systems short Introduction of each song. In CD and MP3 flat file mode, you may set the scan on or off. If activated, the system will scan through each track. In MP3 directory mode, you may set scan on or off. If activated, the system will scan in the current directory. 17. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease volume. If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on. 18. CD: Press to enter CD mode. If a CD is already in the system, the disc will begin play. 19. CD slot: Insert a CD, label side up. art=221cf819_a art=rancf837_a art=221cf823_a CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Mazda CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information. 20. Cassette slot: Insert a cassette, facing to the right. 27 PAGE: 27 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 28 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Entertainment Systems Premium in-dash CD6/MP3 disc audio system CIMS #1273156 com_premcd.mbs itdseq=25 art=rancf844_a 1. AM/FM: Press to select AM/FM1/FM2 frequency bands. 2. CD: Press to enter CD mode. If a CD is already in the system, the disc will start playing. 3. EJ (CD eject): To eject an individual CD, press CD and select the correct slot number by pressing the memory preset buttons. Press and hold EJ to eject all loaded CDs. 4. CLK (Clock): Press CLK until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINUTE is displayed. Press MENU to adjust the hours/minutes. Press CLK to display the time when the ignition is off. art=rancf825_a art=rancf837_a art=rancf827_b art=rancf833_a 28 PAGE: 28 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 29 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Entertainment Systems 5. MUTE: Press to mute the playing media. Press again to return to the playing media. art=rancf834_a 6. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly to toggle through the following / to make modes and use adjustment in those modes. Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for MENU to set. AM/FM1/FM2 . Press MENU to access. Use When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system will store the last one in the remaining presets. Bass: Press MENU to decrease/increase the bass setting. Treble: Press MENU art=rancf838_a art=rancf846_a to decrease/increase the treble setting. Balance: Press MENU to adjust the audio between the left and right speakers. MENU to adjust the audio between the front and Fade: Press rear speakers. / to go to Next/previous directory: In MP3 mode, press MENU the previous/next directory. Flat file/directory mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU to access this MENU to select flat file mode or directory mode. feature. Use Track #/normal music name/file name: Press MENU to access and use / to scroll through MP3 display options (track #, normal music name or file name). / ) the radio 7. TUNE/DISC: Press to manually go down/up ( frequency, select the previous/next CD or to select various settings in menu mode. In MP3 directory mode, press / to access the previous/next directory 8. TEXT: In MP3 normal music name/file name mode, press to view the next 12 characters in the MP3 music name/filename of the current MP3 track and directory. 29 PAGE: 29 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 30 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Entertainment Systems 9. SHUFF (Shuffle): Press to play the tracks on the current CD/MP3 in random order. In MP3 directory mode, press to play the tracks within the current directory in random order. 10. REPEAT: Press to repeat the current CD/MP3 track. 11. FF (Fast forward): Press to manually advance in a CD track. 12. REW (Rewind): Press to manually reverse in a CD track. art=rancf845_a art=221cf806_a art=221cf805_a REW 1 13. Memory presets: To set a station: Select frequency band AM/FM; tune to a station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns. To select a preset station, press the desired memory preset. / 14. SEEK/TRACK: In radio, CD and MP3 flat file mode, press to access the next/previous strong station or track. In MP3 directory mode, press to select the next/previous track in the current directory. 15. SCAN: In radio, CD and MP3 flat file mode, press for a brief sampling of radio stations or CD/MP3 tracks. In MP3 directory mode, press to hear a brief sampling of all tracks in the current directory. Press again to stop. 16. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease volume. If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on. 17. LOAD: To load a CD/MP3 disc to a specific slot, press LOAD and select the slot number by pressing the memory preset buttons. Press and hold LOAD to autoload up to six discs. art=rancf828_b art=rancf840_a art=221cf812_a art=221cf841_a 30 PAGE: 30 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 31 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Entertainment Systems 18. CD slot: Insert a CD, label side up. CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Mazda CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information. GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION Radio frequencies: AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are: AM - 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz FM- 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz Radio reception factors: There are three factors that can affect radio reception: • Distance/strength: The further you travel from a station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception. • Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences, traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception. • Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed. Cassette/player care: Do: • Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less. • Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole and turning the hub. • Remove loose labels before inserting tapes. • Allow tapes which have been subjected to extreme heat, humidity or cold to reach a moderate temperature before playing. • Clean the cassette player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after 10–12 hours of play to maintain good sound/operation. CIMS #1010866 com_207cares.fly itdseq=26 31 PAGE: 31 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 32 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Entertainment Systems Don’t: • Expose tapes to direct sunlight, extreme humidity, heat or cold. • Leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being played. CD/CD player care: Do: • Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface. • Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out. Don’t: • Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time. • Insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine. • Clean using a circular motion. CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Mazda CD players. Dirty, warped or damaged CDs, irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further information. Audio system warranty and service: Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your authorized Mazda dealership. 32 PAGE: 32 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 33 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Climate Controls HEATER ONLY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) 1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. 2. Temperature selection: Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle. 3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control. : Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents. OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. : Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the floor vents. : Distributes outside air through the floor vents. CIMS #1064356 com_heatran.fly itdseq=27 art=rancf780_a : Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and floor vents. : Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents. Operating tips • To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place the air flow selector in the position. • To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm weather, do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position. • Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air flow to the rear seats. • Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield. To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather: 1. Select CIMS #1052492 com_htonlytips.fly itdseq=28 . 2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort. 3. Set the fan speed to the highest setting. 4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows. To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel. 33 PAGE: 33 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 34 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Climate Controls WARNING: Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) 1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. 2. Temperature selection: Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle. 3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control. MAX A/C (if equipped): A/C compressor is ON. Recirculated air flows from the instrument panel vents only. Temperature of air is not adjustable (cold only). A/C (if equipped): A/C compressor is ON. Outside air flows from the instrument panel vents only. : Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents only. (A/C compressor is off). OFF: Outside air is shut off and the fan motor does not operate. : Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the floor vents. (A/C compressor is ON). CIMS #1284326 com_man-ac-mbs.fly itdseq=29 art=rancf781_a : Distributes outside air through the floor vents. (A/C compressor is off). : Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and the floor vents. (A/C compressor is ON). : Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents only. (A/C compressor is ON). Operating tips • To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place position. the air flow selector in the CIMS #1284327 com_op-tipfly.mbs itdseq=30 • To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position. 34 PAGE: 34 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 35 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Climate Controls • Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents. • Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats. • Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield. To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather: 1. Select . 2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort. 3. Set the fan speed to the highest setting. 4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows. To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel. WARNING: Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. 35 PAGE: 35 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 36 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Lights CIMS #222826 com_headlamp_title itdseq=31 CIMS #54756 com_headlamp_control itdseq=32 HEADLAMP CONTROL Turns the lamps off. Turns on the parking lamps, instrument panel lamps, license plate lamps and tail lamps. OFF art=rancf504_a Turns the headlamps on. High beams After turning the headlamps on, push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate. Pull the lever towards you to deactivate. CIMS #1124037 com_brights.mazda itdseq=33 art=rancf322_a Flash to pass Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate. CIMS #54762 com_flash_to_pass itdseq=34 Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped) Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output. To activate: • the ignition must be in the ON position and CIMS #222828 com_drl_title_ie itdseq=35 CIMS #1124036 com_daytime_lamps.mazda itdseq=36 art=rancf323_a 36 PAGE: 36 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 37 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Lights • the headlamp control is in the OFF or parking lamp. WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system does not activate the parking lights or side marker lights and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision. CIMS #83532 com_fog-title.ie itdseq=37 Foglamp control (if equipped) The foglamps can be turned on when the ignition is in the ON position and the headlamp control is in either of the following positions: • Parking lamps • Low beams Press the foglamp control to activate the foglamps. Press the foglamp control again to deactivate the foglamps. When the highbeams are activated, the foglamps will not operate. CIMS #528621 com_foglamps.05 itdseq=38 PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel and all applicable switches in the vehicle during headlamp and parklamp operation. Move the control up or down to adjust the intensity of the panel lighting. DIM Move the control to the full upright position, past detent, to turn on the interior lamps. AIMING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed before leaving the assembly plant. If your vehicle is involved in an accident or if you have problems fixing the alignment of your headlamps, have them checked by a qualified service technician. Headlamp aim adjustment The headlamps are designed to be mechanically aimed, but can also be aimed visually by doing the following: CIMS #222830 com_panel_dimmer_title itdseq=39 CIMS #1048941 com_panel_dimmer2.ran itdseq=40 art=unocf507_a art=rancf505_a CIMS #975083 com_aim-lites.info.fly itdseq=41 CIMS #1437296 com_vert_aim.mbs itdseq=42 37 PAGE: 37 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 38 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Lights 1. Park your vehicle on a level surface about 25 feet (7.6 meters) away from a vertical plain surface (3). Check your headlamp alignment at night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam pattern. • (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters) • (2) Center height of lamp to ground • (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters) • (4) Horizontal reference line • (5) Center of headlamps • (6) Center line of the vehicle 2. The center of the headlamp is marked either on the lens (a circle or cross marker) or on the bulb shield, internal to the lamp (mark or feature). Measure the height from the center of your headlamp to the ground (2) and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) long horizontal line on the wall or screen (1) at this height (masking tape works well). 3. Turn on the low beam headlamps and open the hood. 4. Locate the high intensity area of the beam pattern and place the top edge of the intensity zone even with the horizontal reference line (4). If the top edge of the high intensity area is not even with the horizontal line, follow the next step to adjust it. art=ranmc313_a art=ranmc314_a 38 PAGE: 38 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 39 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Lights 5. Locate the vertical adjuster for each headlamp. Adjust the aim by using a 4 mm wrench to turn the adjuster control either clockwise (to adjust down) or counterclockwise (to adjust up). 6. In addition to the horizontal line marked in step 2, a pair of vertical lines (5) must be marked at the center line of the headlamps on the wall or screen. art=mbscf406_a 7. On the wall or screen, locate the high intensity area of the beam pattern. The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment. If the left edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical line, follow the next step to adjust it. 8. Locate the horizontal adjuster for each headlamp. Use a 4 mm wrench, turning it clockwise or counterclockwise, to place the left edge of the high intensity area even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment. art=mbscf407_a CIMS #54764 com_turn_indicator itdseq=43 TURN SIGNAL CONTROL • Push down to activate the left turn signal. • Push up to activate the right turn signal. art=rancf324_a 39 PAGE: 39 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 40 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Lights INTERIOR LAMPS CIMS #54745 com_interior.02 itdseq=44 Courtesy/reading lamps (if equipped) The courtesy lamp lights when: • any door is opened. • the instrument panel dimmer switch is held up until the courtesy lamps come on. • the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is OFF. CIMS #628962 com_courtesy_lamps.ran itdseq=45 BULB REPLACEMENT CIMS #80513 com_ext_bulbs.02 itdseq=46 Headlamp Condensation CIMS #1462914 com_condensation itdseq=47 art=rancf308_a The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear within 45 minutes of headlamp operation. Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently. CIMS #600056 com_check-bulbs.j14 itdseq=48 Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an “E” for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe visibility. NOTE: The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time. CIMS #684809 com_bulb_chart.mbs itdseq=49 Function Park/turn/side marker lamps (front) Headlamps Fog lamps (if equipped) Hi-mount brake lamp Number of bulbs 2 2 2 1 Trade number 3457 AK (amber) 9007 9006 922 40 PAGE: 40 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 41 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Lights Function Number of bulbs Trade number Rear stop/tail lamps 2 4157K or 3157K Rear turn lamps 2 3156 Rear license plate 2 194 lamps 3156 Backup lamps 2 Dome lamp 1 912 Map/dome-SuperCab 2 904 (if equipped) Map/dome-Regular 1 904 Cab (if equipped) 1 904 All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted. To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer. Replacing the interior bulbs Check the operation of the following interior bulbs frequently: • interior overhead lamp • map lamp For bulb replacement, see an authorized Mazda dealer. CIMS #600057 com_interior_bulbs.j14 itdseq=50 Replacing headlamp bulbs NOTE: The procedure can be difficult. Your Mazda dealer has the proper tools, training and parts to perform this task. If you have difficulty with this, visit your local Mazda dealer. CIMS #684808 com_headlamps.mbs itdseq=51 WARNING: Handling Halogen Bulbs: When a halogen bulb breaks, it is dangerous. These bulbs contain pressurized gas. If one is broken, it will explode and serious injuries could be caused by the flying glass. If the glass portion of the bulb is touched with bare hands, body oil could cause the bulb to overheat and explode when lit. Never touch the glass portion of the bulb with your bare hands and always wear eye protection when handling or working around halogen bulbs. Children and Halogen Bulbs: Playing with a halogen bulb is dangerous. Serious injuries could be caused by dropping a halogen bulb or breaking in some other way. Always keep halogen bulbs out of the reach of children. 41 PAGE: 41 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 42 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Lights To remove the headlamp bulb: 1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position, then open the hood. 2. Reach behind the lamp assembly for access and disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Locate the bulb retaining ring behind the headlamp assembly. 4. Remove the bulb retaining ring by turning it counterclockwise and remove the old bulb by gently pulling it straight back out of the lamp assembly. Keep the retaining ring to retain the new bulb. art=mbscf404_a art=mbscf400_a To install the new bulb: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hands could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated. Always wear safety glasses while handling bulbs. NOTE: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol before being used. 1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base facing upward, insert the glass end of the bulb into the lamp assembly. You may need to turn the bulb left or right to align the grooves in the plastic base with the tabs in the lamp assembly. When the grooves are aligned, push the bulb into the lamp assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear of the lamp assembly. 2. Install the bulb retaining ring over the plastic base until it contacts the rear of the socket by rotating clockwise until you feel a “stop.” 42 PAGE: 42 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 43 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Lights 3. Install the electrical connector into the plastic base until it snaps, locking it into position. 4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly. If the headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you should not need to align it again. Replacing front park/turn side marker bulbs 1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position, then open the hood. 2. Remove the screw from lamp assembly. 3. Disengage lamp assembly by pulling it straight forward. It has a snap fit. art=mbscf405_a 4. Rotate bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly. art=mbscf408_a 5. Carefully pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb. 6. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning clockwise. 7. Align the lamp on the vehicle and push to snap in place. art=dnomc306_a 43 PAGE: 43 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 44 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Lights 8. Install the screw on lamp assembly. Replacing stop lamp/tail lamp/sidemarker lamp/turn lamp/backup lamp bulbs These bulbs are located in the same portion of the tail lamp assembly, one just below the other. Follow the same steps to replace either bulb: 1. Open the tailgate to expose the lamp assemblies. 2. Remove the four screws and the lamp assembly from vehicle. 3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly. 4. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb. 5. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning clockwise. 6. Install the lamp assembly and secure with four screws. art=mbscf401_a art=mbscf409_a 44 PAGE: 44 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 45 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Lights Replacing fog lamp bulbs WARNING: Handling Halogen Bulbs: When a halogen bulb breaks, it is dangerous. These bulbs contain pressurized gas. If one is broken, it will explode and serious injuries could be caused by the flying glass. If the glass portion of the bulb is touched with bare hands, body oil could cause the bulb to overheat and explode when lit. Never touch the glass portion of the bulb with your bare hands and always wear eye protection when handling or working around halogen bulbs. Children and Halogen Bulbs: Playing with a halogen bulb is dangerous. Serious injuries could be caused by dropping a halogen bulb or breaking in some other way. Always keep halogen bulbs out of the reach of children. NOTE: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol before being used. 1. Remove the bulb socket from the fog lamp by turning counterclockwise. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the fog lamp bulb. art=ranmc306_a 3. Connect the electrical connector to the new fog lamp bulb. 4. Install the bulb socket in the fog lamp turning clockwise. Replacing high-mount brake lamp To remove the brake lamp assembly: 1. Remove the two screws and lamp assembly from vehicle. 2. Remove the bulb socket from lamp assembly by rotating it counterclockwise. art=ranmc312_a 3. Carefully pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb. To install the brake lamp assembly: 1. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly by rotating clockwise. 2. Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure with two screws. 45 PAGE: 45 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 46 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Lights Replacing license plate lamp bulbs The license plate bulbs are located behind the rear bumper. To change the license plate lamp bulbs: 1. Reach behind the rear bumper to locate the bulb socket. 2. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove. 3. Pull out the old bulb from socket and push in the new bulb. 4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise. art=exdmc038_b 46 PAGE: 46 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 47 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driver Controls CIMS #992737 com_multi-lever.ran itdseq=52 MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER Windshield wiper: Rotate the end of the control away from you to increase the speed of the wipers (from desired interval to low or high speed position); rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers. art=rancf325_a Windshield washer: Push the end of the stalk: • briefly: causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid. • a quick push and hold: the wipers will swipe three times with washer fluid. • a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to ten seconds. art=rancf326_a CIMS #1445671 com_tilt-steering-mbs itdseq=53 TILT STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED) To adjust the steering wheel: 1. Pull and hold the steering wheel release control toward you. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down until you find the desired location. 3. Release the steering wheel release control. This will lock the steering wheel in position. art=207cf323_a 47 PAGE: 47 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 48 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driver Controls WARNING: Adjusting the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Moving it can very easily cause the driver to abruptly turn to the left or right. This can lead to loss of control or an accident. Never adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving. CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED) Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These include: • Utility compartment with cassette/compact disc storage • Cupholders • Coin holder slots • Flip up armrest • Passenger airbag on/off switch (if equipped) CIMS #101591 com_center.ie itdseq=54 CIMS #101830 com_center.09 itdseq=55 art=rancf520_a WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you in a collision. AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC) Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty. CIMS #75589 com_powerpoint itdseq=56 CIMS #81461 com_powerpoint.04 itdseq=57 48 PAGE: 48 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 49 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driver Controls The auxiliary power points are located on the instrument panel. Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if equipped). To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s) over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W. Refer to Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for fuse ratings in your vehicle. art=rancf517_d To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running. Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used. Cigar/Cigarette lighter (if equipped) Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter socket. Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from its heating position when it is ready to be used. Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your warranty. CIMS #993361 com_pwr-window.f12 itdseq=58 POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure themselves. WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the proximity of the window openings. 49 PAGE: 49 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 50 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driver Controls Press and hold the bottom part of the rocker switch to open the window. Press and hold the top part of the rocker switch to close the window. art=rancf518_b One touch down Allows the driver’s window to open fully without holding the control down. Press completely down on AUTO and release quickly. Press again to stop. CIMS #959854 com_auto-dwn-window itdseq=59 EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power mirror control (if equipped) CIMS #764576 com_mirror-title itdseq=60 CIMS #689332 com_pwrmirr-title.maz.ie itdseq=61 CIMS #76084 com_power-mirrors.arrows itdseq=62 To adjust your mirrors: to adjust the left 1. Select mirror or to adjust the right mirror. 2. Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror. 3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place. Fold-away mirrors Pull the side mirrors in carefully when driving through a narrow space, like an automatic car wash. SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed control does not work at speeds below 30 mph (48 km/h). art=rancf519_b art=207cf015_a CIMS #959877 com_foldaway.fly itdseq=63 art=unocf342_a CIMS #1122037 com_speed-cntrl.mbs itdseq=64 50 PAGE: 50 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 51 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driver Controls WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. You may lose control of the vehicle. WARNING: Do not shift the gearshift lever into N (Neutral) with the speed control on. You may lose control of the vehicle or cause engine system damage. CIMS #1264224 com_use-spd-cntrl.mbs04 itdseq=65 Setting speed control The controls for using your speed control are located on the steering wheel for your convenience. 1. Press the ON control and release it. 2. Accelerate to the desired speed. art=rancf328_a 3. Press the SET + control and release it. 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. art=rancf331_a 5. The indicator light on the instrument cluster will turn on. Note: • Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill. • If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed. • If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage. • If the vehicle speed decreases to 30 mph (48 km/h) or less, your speed control will disengage Disengaging speed control To disengage the speed control: • Depress the brake pedal or • Depress the clutch pedal (if equipped). 51 PAGE: 51 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 52 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driver Controls Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed. Note: When you use the clutch pedal to disengage the speed control, the engine speed may briefly increase, this is normal. Resuming a set speed Press the RES (resume) control and release it. This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed. The RES control will not work if the vehicle speed is not faster than 30 mph (48 km/h). Increasing speed while using speed control There are three ways to set a higher speed: • Press and hold the SET + control until you get to the desired speed, then release the control. • Press and release the SET + control to operate the Tap-Up function. Each tap will increase the set speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). art=rancf330_a art=rancf331_a • Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control. Reducing speed while using speed control There are three ways to reduce a set speed: • Press and hold the CST - control until you get to the desired speed, then release the control. • Press and release the CST control to operate the Tap-Down function. Each tap will decrease the set speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). art=rancf332_a 52 PAGE: 52 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 53 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driver Controls • Depress the brake pedal or the clutch pedal (if equipped) until the desired vehicle speed is reached, press the SET + control. art=rancf331_a Turning off speed control There are three ways to turn off the speed control: • Depress the brake pedal or the clutch pedal (if equipped). This will not erase your vehicle’s previously set speed. • Press the speed control OFF control. • Turn OFF the ignition. Note: When you turn off the speed control or the ignition, your speed control set speed memory is erased. Note: Fully depressing the clutch pedal may cause a flare in engine RPM as the throttle is returned to idle. This is normal. OVERDRIVE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) Activating overdrive (Overdrive) is the normal drive position for the best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through all available gears. art=rancf329_a CIMS #197226 com_overdrive.title-ie itdseq=66 CIMS #111943 com_overdrive-activate itdseq=67 CIMS #713261 com_overdrive-deativate.mbs itdseq=68 Deactivating overdrive Press the Transmission Control Switch (TCS) located on the end of O/D ON/OFF the gearshift lever. The O/D Off indicator light will illuminate on the instrument cluster. The transmission will operate in all gears except overdrive. To return to normal overdrive mode, press the Transmission Control Switch again. The O/D Off indicator light will no longer be illuminated. When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will (Overdrive) mode. automatically return to normal art=rangf110_a 53 PAGE: 53 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 54 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driver Controls For additional information about the gearshift lever and the transmission control switch operation refer to the Automatic Transmission Operation section of the Driving chapter. BED EXTENDER (IF EQUIPPED) Your vehicle may be equipped with a bed extender designed to extend the pickup box for longer loads. To extend the bed extender: 1. Lower tailgate. 2. Pull the round knobs on each side of the extender to release it from the pickup box. 3. Pivot extender on to the tailgate. 4. Evenly push down on the extender and push the round knobs in on each side locking it in place. Green markings on the shaft indicate the locked position. The locking clip screws below the middle bar can be tightened counterclockwise for extra security. Note: If the red marking on the shaft is visible, the bed extender is not locked or properly secured. CIMS #506831 com_bed-extender.225 itdseq=69 art=207cf332_a art=221cf339_b To stow the bed extender, follow Steps 1 through 4 in reverse order. The bed extender may be used to secure a load of up to 100 lb. (46 kg) on the tailgate. The bed extender should always be kept in the stowed position with the tailgate closed when not in use. When driving the vehicle off road, the bed extender should be in the stowed position and the tailgate closed. 54 PAGE: 54 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 55 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driver Controls To remove the bed extender: 1. Extend the bed extender. 2. Pull the round knobs on each side of the extender to unlock it. Make sure the locking clip screws are loose before removing the extender. 3. Press the locking clips below the middle bar on each side and lift the extender out of the bed. Note: Remove and store the bed extender when not in use. To install the bed extender, follow the removal procedure in reverse order. art=221cf338_a 55 PAGE: 55 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 56 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Locks and Security CIMS #977601 itdseq=70 KEYS com_keys.vil The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of loss, replacement keys are available from your dealer. You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an emergency. POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED) Press the top of the control to unlock all doors and the bottom to lock all doors. UNLOCK CIMS #83545 com_powerdoor-title.ie itdseq=71 CIMS #101856 com_power-doors.03 itdseq=72 art=rancf508_a LOCK REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CIMS #1392205 com_remote-title-ie.fly itdseq=73 CIMS #1031085 com_rem-entry.fly-panic itdseq=74 Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could be caused by: • weather conditions, • nearby radio towers, • structures around the vehicle, or • other vehicles parked next to your vehicle. Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to: 56 PAGE: 56 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 57 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Locks and Security • unlock the vehicle doors without a key. • lock all the vehicle doors without a key. • activate the personal alarm. art=navcf305_a If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take ALL remote entry transmitters with you to your authorized dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem. CIMS #1090284 com_unlock.fly-ran itdseq=75 Unlocking the doors 1. Press and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior lamps will illuminate. 2. Press and release again within three seconds to unlock all the doors. CIMS #1090285 com_lock.fly-ran Locking the doors itdseq=76 • Press and release to lock all the doors. The park lamps will flash once to confirm lock; if any of the doors are not properly closed, the lamps will not flash. • If is pressed a second time within three seconds, the lamps will flash again and the horn will chirp to confirm all doors are locked and closed. If either door is ajar the lamps will not flash and the horn will chirp twice. Sounding a panic alarm Press to activate the alarm. The horn will sound and the parklamps will flash for approximately 3 minutes. Press again or turn the ignition to the 4 (ON) position to deactivate, or wait for the alarm to timeout in 3 minutes. Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 1 (ACCESSORY), 2 (LOCK) or 3 (OFF) position. CIMS #1513131 com_panic.fly-ran itdseq=77 Replacing the battery The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent. CIMS #998940 com_battery-remote.fly itdseq=78 57 PAGE: 57 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 58 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Locks and Security To replace the battery: 1. Twist a thin coin between the two halves of the remote entry transmitter near the key ring. DO NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE FRONT HOUSING OF THE REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER. 2. Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals on the back surface of the circuit board. 3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries. 4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity. 5. Snap the two halves back together. Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter should operate normally after battery replacement. Replacing lost remote entry transmitters If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for reprogramming. How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four) available before beginning this procedure. art=dewcf305_b art=f23mc007_a CIMS #999031 com_lost-remote.fly itdseq=79 58 PAGE: 58 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 59 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Locks and Security To reprogram the remote entry transmitters: 4 1. Ensure the vehicle is 3 electronically unlocked. 5 2. Put the key in the ignition. 2 3. Turn the key from the 2 (LOCK) position to 3 (OFF). 1 4. Cycle eight times rapidly (within 10 seconds) between the 3 (OFF) position and 4 (ON). Note: The eighth turn must end in the 4 (ON) position. 5. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming mode has been activated. 6. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter. Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the procedure over again. 7. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry transmitter has been programmed. 8. Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter. 9. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position after you have finished programming all of the remote entry transmitters. Note: After 20 seconds, you will automatically exit the programming mode. 10. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming mode has been exited. Illuminated entry The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm. The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if: • the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or • the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or • after 25 seconds of illumination. The inside lights will not turn off if: • they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or • any door is open. The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps after several minutes if they are left on accidentally. art=f12dr029_a CIMS #1258992 com_illuminate.fly-ran itdseq=80 59 PAGE: 59 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 60 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Locks and Security SECURILOCKY PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition. Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key. Note: The SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system is not compatible with non-Mazda aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection. Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine. Anti-theft indicator The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster. • When the ignition is in the 2 (LOCK) position, the indicator will flash once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLocky system is functioning as a theft deterrent. • When the ignition is in the 4 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for 3 seconds, then turn off to indicate normal system functionality. If a problem occurs with the SecuriLocky system, the indicator will flash rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 4 (ON) position. If this occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for service. Replacement keys If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed. CIMS #1090876 com_securi-title-ie.fly itdseq=81 CIMS #1514796 com_theft-indic.mbs itdseq=82 art=ranis348_a CIMS #999040 com_coded-key-replace.fly itdseq=83 60 PAGE: 60 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 61 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Locks and Security Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys. Programming spare keys You can program your own coded keys to your vehicle. Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin. Tips: • A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. • Only use Securilocky keys. • You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily accessible. • If no previously programmed coded keys are available, you must take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s) programmed. 1. Insert a previously programmed coded key into the ignition. 4 2. Turn the ignition from the 3 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) 5 position. Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least 2 one second, but no more than 10 seconds. 1 3. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position, and remove the coded key from the ignition. 4. Within ten seconds of removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the other previously programmed coded key into the ignition. 5. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position. Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second but not more than 10 seconds. 6. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position, and remove the second key from the ignition. 7. Within twenty seconds of removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the unprogrammed key (new/valet key) into the ignition. CIMS #999041 com_keyless-program.fly itdseq=84 art=207cf313_a 61 PAGE: 61 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 62 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Locks and Security 8. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position. Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second. 9. Your new unprogrammed key is now programmed. If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will flash on and off rapidly. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new key(s) programmed. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this procedure from Step 1 for each additional key. 62 PAGE: 62 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 63 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints SEATING CIMS #1072391 com_seats.231nad itdseq=85 Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped) CIMS #1292966 com_front-seat.mbs itdseq=86 WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving. WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. Sitting in a reclined position while the vehicle is moving is dangerous because you cannot get the full protection from seat belts. During sudden braking or a collision, you can slide under the lap belt and suffer serious internal injuries. For maximum protection, sit well back and upright. The lap portion of the seat belt worn too high is dangerous. In a collision, this would concentrate the impact force directly on the abdominal area, causing serious injury. Wear the lap portion of the belt snugly and as low as possible. Lift the release bar to move seat forward or backward. Ensure that the seat is locked into place. art=ranss579_a Pull lever located at the side of the seat cushion up to adjust seatback. art=ranss580_a 63 PAGE: 63 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 64 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints 60/40 seat (if equipped) To gain access to the storage compartment in your armrest (if equipped), lift the latch to open lid. The 60/40 seat cupholder (if equipped) is detachable for cleaning. • Firmly grasp the bottom of the cup holder and pull up. art=ranss582_a To re-attach: • Slide the cupholder over the two pins located on the front of the 60% driver’s seat. • Press down until it is firmly latched into place. Using the manual lumbar support (if equipped) Turn the lumbar support control clockwise to increase firmness. Turn the lumbar support control counterclockwise to increase softness. CIMS #442288 com_manual_lumbar-title.ie itdseq=87 CIMS #75592 com_manual_seat_adjust.01 itdseq=88 Passenger side rear access (if equipped) Pull up on the recliner handle. The seat will lean forward. Lift the release bar to move the seat forward to access the rear area of the cab. CIMS #1264846 com_rear-access.mbs itdseq=89 art=navss509_a art=ranss572_a 64 PAGE: 64 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 65 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints To return seat to original position, slide the seat bottom back, then push the seatback up to lock it in place. The seat will lock, and you will have to use the release bar to move the seat back to the original position. CIMS #75601 com_rear_seat_adjust itdseq=90 CIMS #1124246 com_jump-seat.2doormbs itdseq=91 REAR SEATS Center facing jump seat (two–door Cab Plus) (if equipped) To open, pull inboard and down on the seat strap. To stow the seat, pull seat bottom back to the fully upright position. WARNING: Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump seat. CIMS #899696 com_rear-jump_seat.mbs itdseq=92 Center facing jump seat (four–door Cab Plus 4) (if equipped) To open, pull seat assembly down, then raise seatback. To stow the seat, fold seat back down and raise seat assembly to the fully upright position. art=ranss526_a WARNING: Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump seat. CIMS #55015 com_seatbelts.01 itdseq=93 CIMS #683646 com_belt-precautions.mbs itdseq=94 SAFETY RESTRAINTS Safety restraints precautions WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained. WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. 65 PAGE: 65 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 66 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicles is moving. Adjusting the driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The driver could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is stopped. WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt. WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person. WARNING: On four-door Cab Plus 4 vehicles, do not open the rear door when the rear seat belt is still buckled. 66 PAGE: 66 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 67 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints CIMS #102366 com_manual-locking-belt.ran itdseq=95 Combination lap and shoulder belts 1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. art=f12ss511_a 2. To unfasten, push the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle. art=f12ss512_a The front outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The front passenger outboard safety belt has two types of locking modes described below: Energy Management Feature • This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision. CIMS #803601 com_energ-man-feat.ran2 itdseq=96 • This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest. CIMS #685451 com_lapbelts.mbs itdseq=97 Adjusting the center and rear center facing jump seat lap belts The lap belt does not adjust automatically. 67 PAGE: 67 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 68 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING: The lap belts should fit snugly and as low as possible around the hips, not around the waist. Failure to position the lap belt correctly may cause serious injury in an accident. Insert the tongue into the correct buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from). To lengthen the belt, turn the tongue at a right angle to the belt and pull across your lap until it reaches the buckle. To tighten the belt, pull the loose end of the belt through the tongue until it fits snugly across the hips. Shorten and fasten the belt when not in use to keep the belt away from door openings and available after unfolding the seats. For the rear jump seat, shorten and fold the belt into the seat when not in use. art=mbsss111_a art=mbsss112_a Vehicle sensitive mode This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers. CIMS #73763 com_vehicle-locking-mode.01 itdseq=98 Automatic locking mode (outboard front passenger seating position only) for use with child safety seats In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt. CIMS #1124247 com_when_use-title.mbs itdseq=99 CIMS #690605 com_when-to-use-lok-mode.mbs itdseq=100 68 PAGE: 68 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 69 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints When to use the automatic locking mode • Any time a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front seat. Refer to Safety Restraints for Children, Safety Seats for Children, or Passenger airbag On/Off switch later in this chapter. How to use the automatic locking mode (Outboard front passenger seating position only) for use with child safety seats • Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. • Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out. CIMS #1124248 com_how-to-use-loc-mode.mbs itdseq=101 art=enoss522_c art=exdss025_a • Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode. CIMS #1099341 com_cancel-lock-mode.mbs itdseq=102 How to disengage the automatic locking mode Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. 69 PAGE: 69 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 70 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the entire seat belt system should be checked for proper operation by an authorized dealer. Verify that the (automatic locking retractors” in all outboard seating positions are functioning properly. Additionally check that the (automatic locking mode( feature for child safety seat in the passenger outboard seating position is functioning properly. WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. WARNING: Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Safety belt pretensioner Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions. CIMS #594556 com_pretensioner-title itdseq=103 CIMS #1217381 com_pretensioner.mbs itdseq=104 The safety belt pretensioner is a device which removes excess webbing from the safety belt system. The safety belt pretensioner uses the same crash sensor system as the front airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS). When the safety belt pretensioner deploys, webbing from the lap and shoulder belt is tightened. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter. WARNING: The driver and front passenger seat belt system (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front airbags and safety belt pretensioners. Front safety belt height adjustment CIMS #911066 com_height-adjust.mbs itdseq=105 Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments for the driver and front passenger. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. 70 PAGE: 70 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 71 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints • Regular Cab and four–door Cab Plus 4 art=ranss514_c • two–door Cab Plus art=ranss513_c To lower the shoulder belt height, push the button and slide the height adjuster down. To raise the height of the shoulder belt, slide the height adjuster up. Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place. WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision. Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt assembly is too short for you, even when fully extended, 20 cm (8 inches) can be added to the safety belt assembly by adding a safety belt extension assembly. Safety belt extension assemblies can be obtained from your authorized Mazda dealership. Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. CIMS #598712 com_extension-assy.j14 itdseq=106 71 PAGE: 71 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 72 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints NOTE: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. Safety belt warning light and indicator chime CIMS #55029 com_light-chime.01 itdseq=107 The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts. CIMS #55036 com_operation.01 itdseq=108 Conditions of operation If... The driver’s safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position... The driver’s safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding... The driver’s safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position... Then... The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds. The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off. The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off. BeltMinderY The BeltMindery feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster. CIMS #522761 com_belt_minder-title itdseq=109 CIMS #690991 com_belt_minder.mbs itdseq=110 72 PAGE: 72 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 73 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints If... The driver’s safety belt is not buckled before the vehicle has reached at least 5 km/h (3 mph) and 1-2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to ON... The driver’s safety belt is buckled while the safety belt indicator light is illuminated and the safety belt warning chime is sounding... The driver’s safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position... Then... The BeltMindery feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds every 30 seconds, repeating for approximately 5 minutes or until driver’s safety belt is buckled. The BeltMindery feature will not activate. The BeltMindery feature will not activate. CIMS #598714 com_safety_stats.j14 itdseq=111 The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts (All statistics based on U.S. data): Reasons given... 9Crashes are rare events9 9I’m not going far9 9Belts are uncomfortable9 Consider... 36,700 crashes occur every day. The more we drive, the more we are exposed to 9rare9 events, even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime. 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home. Safety belts are designed to enhance comfort. If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible; this can improve comfort. 73 PAGE: 73 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 74 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints Reasons given... 9I was in a hurry9 9Seat belts don’t work9 9Traffic is light9 9Belts wrinkle my clothes9 9The people I’m with don’t wear belts9 9I have an airbag9 9I’d rather be thrown clear9 Consider... Prime time for an accident. Safety Belt Warning Chime reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up. Safety belts, when used properly, reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars, and by 60% in light trucks. Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle crashes, many when no other vehicles are around. Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are unbelted. Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people. Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate behavior they see. Airbags offer greater protection when used with safety belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers. Not a good idea. People who are ejected are 40 times more likely to DIE. Safety belts help prevent ejection, WE CAN’T 9PICK OUR CRASH9. WARNING: Always wear the safety belt. Do not be tempted to sit on top of the belt to fool police or to defeat the warning system. The safety belt and safety belt warning system are there to protect your life. 74 PAGE: 74 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 75 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints One time disable Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an ignition ON cycle, the BeltMindery will be disabled for that ignition cycle only. CIMS #519736 com_one-time_disable itdseq=112 Deactivating/activating the BeltMinderY feature Read Steps 1 - 9 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation/activation programming procedure. The BeltMindery feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure: Before following the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met: • The parking brake is set. • The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral position (manual transmission). • The ignition switch is in the OFF position. • All vehicle doors are closed. • The driver’s safety belt is unbuckled. • The parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If vehicle is equipped with Autolamps, this will not affect the procedure). CIMS #444324 com_minder_on-off itdseq=113 WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the BeltMindery feature while driving the vehicle. BeltMindery activation and deactivation procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT START THE ENGINE.) 2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1–2 minutes.) • Steps 3–5 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated. 3. At a moderate speed, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the safety belt unbuckled. This can be done before or during BeltMindery warning activation. 4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the parklamps/headlamps. 75 PAGE: 75 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 76 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints 5. At a moderate speed, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the safety belt unbuckled. • After Step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three seconds. 6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off, at a moderate speed, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. • This will disable BeltMindery if it is currently enabled, or enable BeltMindery if it is currently disabled. 7. Confirmation of disabling BeltMindery is provided by the safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds. 8. Confirmation of enabling BeltMindery is provided by: • The safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds. • Followed by three seconds with the safety belt warning light off. • Once again, the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds. 9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete. Safety belt maintenance Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. NOTE: If unsure about the proper procedures, bring your vehicle to an authorized Mazda dealership for inspection. Inspect the safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts, replacing if necessary. Check all automatic locking retractors on all outboard seating positions as well as the automatic locking mode for child safety seats on the passenger front belt. All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if equipped), LATCH child seat tether anchors and lower anchors (if equipped), and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Mazda recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized Mazda technician finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. CIMS #1112659 com_belt-maint.mbs itdseq=114 76 PAGE: 76 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 77 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints The energy absorbing functions may have been activated in a collision so the restraints should be examined; if the front airbags have deployed, the pretensioners have also deployed and must be replaced — regardless of whether there was an occupant in the passenger seat or not. WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision. Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter. CIMS #599046 com_air-bag-systems.j14 itdseq=115 AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) art=ranss510_f CIMS #683851 com_imp_precauts.mbs itdseq=116 Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) precautions The supplemental restraint system is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries. WARNING: Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or gently and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module. Always wear your safety belt. art=mbsss107_a 77 PAGE: 77 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 78 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING: Airbags have been known to kill or injure a child in front facing child restraints. When placing a child safety seat in a front seating position including the center (if equipped), you should turn off the passenger airbag switch after being certain the child is properly restrained. If the child safety seat is in the outboard seating position, slide the seat all the way back. WARNING: Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump seat. WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off. See Passenger airbag ON/OFF switch in this chapter. art=mbsss114_a art=mbsss113_b WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided. WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module. WARNING: Never place your arm or feet over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. 78 PAGE: 78 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 79 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING: Never place a rear facing infant seat in the front seat unless the passenger air bag is turned off. Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag: • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. • Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position. WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module including hands or feet. Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury. WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Airbag Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your authorized Mazda dealership. WARNING: Modifications to the front end of the vehicle, including frame, bumper, front end body structure, tow hooks and snow plows may effect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle. WARNING: Additional equipment may effect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Consult your authorized Mazda dealership before installation of additional equipment. WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to an occupant in the center front seating position. CIMS #832821 com_imp_precauts.center itdseq=117 79 PAGE: 79 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 80 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints Children and airbags CIMS #1062867 com_children.mbs itdseq=118 For additional important safety information, read all information on safety restraints in this guide. WARNING: Never place a rearward facing child safety restraint in front of an activated airbag. Airbags have been known to kill or injure children in front facing child safety restraints. Whenever placing a child safety seat in a front seating position (including center if equipped), turn off the passenger side airbag switch after being certain the child is properly restrained. If using a forward facing child safety restraint in the front outboard seat, slide the seat all the way back, and turn off the passenger airbag. If using a rear facing child safety seat in the front outboard seating position, make sure the passenger airbag is turned off and slide the passenger seat all the way forward until the safety seat rests on the dashboard. See Passenger airbag on/off switch in this chapter. WARNING: Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump seat. art=mbsss113_a art=mbsss114_a 80 PAGE: 80 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 81 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING: An airbag can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Child seats should never be placed in the front seats, unless passenger airbag switch is turned off. See Passenger airbag on/off switch in this chapter. WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off. WARNING: Booster seats must be installed only in seating positions equipped with a combination lap/shoulder belt. WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained. CIMS #683852 com_how_work.mbs itdseq=119 How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work? The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains sufficient longitudinal deceleration. The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Airbags are designed to inflate in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts. art=comss002_a 81 PAGE: 81 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 82 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (e.g., baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic. While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, it may also cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control. art=comss003_b WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after inflation. Do not touch them after inflation or you may be burned. WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision. The SRS consists of: • driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and airbags), • passenger airbag deactivation switch and restraint control module (RCM) • a readiness light and tone, 82 PAGE: 82 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 83 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints • and the electrical wiring which connects the components. • Safety belt pretensioners The RCM (restraints control module) monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the passenger airbag deactivation switch, the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag back up power and the airbag ignitors). CIMS #683853 com_deter_operational.mbs itdseq=120 Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses readiness lights in the instrument cluster and the passenger airbag deactivate switch or a tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness section in the Instrumentation chapter or Passenger airbag deactivate switch section in this chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: • The readiness lights will either flash or stay lit. • The readiness lights will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on. art=ranis319_a • A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired. If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced at your authorized Mazda dealership immediately. WARNING: Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a collision. Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles (including safety belt pretensioners) CIMS #683854 com_disposing.mbs itdseq=121 For disposal of safety belt pretensioners, airbags, or airbag equipped vehicles, see your authorized Mazda dealership or qualified technician. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel. 83 PAGE: 83 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 84 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints CIMS #683855 com_deactivate.mbs itdseq=122 Passenger airbag ON/OFF switch WARNING: An airbag ON/OFF switch has been installed in this vehicle. Before driving, always look at the face of the switch to be sure the switch is in the proper position in accordance with these instructions and warnings. Failure to put the switch in a proper position can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. art=ranss502_a ON OFF OFF PASSENGER AIRBAG Turning the passenger airbag off 1. Ignition OFF. ON 2. Insert the ignition key, turn the OFF switch to OFF position and hold in OFF position while removing OFF the key. 3. When the ignition switch is PASSENGER AIRBAG turned to the ON position the OFF light illuminates briefly, momentarily shuts off and then turns back on. This indicates that the passenger airbag is deactivated. Do not use a second key to turn off the passenger airbag, as the lock position might be changed without your knowing. art=ranss501_a 84 PAGE: 84 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 85 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING: You must turn the passenger airbag Off if you have a rear facing child seat in the front seat of the pickup (the center lapbelt on front split seats or the center facing rear seats do not accommodate child seats). Statistics show that children under 12 are more likely to suffer minor injuries in the front passenger seats than adults. If you must have a child in the front passenger seat, place the largest child in the front seat, make sure that the child is belted, the vehicle seat is all the way back, and the passenger airbag is turned OFF. The front seat center lap belt and the center facing rear seats do not accommodate child seats; therefore, you may not be able to put a larger child in the front passenger seat if a child seat is involved. WARNING: If the OFF light fails to illuminate when the passenger airbag switch is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in the ON position, have the passenger airbag switch serviced at your authorized Mazda dealership. WARNING: In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the switch, always remove the ignition key from the passenger air bag ON/OFF switch. Turning the passenger airbag back on The passenger airbag remains OFF until you turn it back ON. 1. Insert the ignition key and turn the switch to ON. ON OFF 2. The OFF light will briefly illuminate when the ignition is OFF turned to ON. This indicates that the passenger airbag is operational. PASSENGER AIRBAG art=ranss500_a 85 PAGE: 85 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 86 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING: If the light is illuminated when the passenger airbag ON/OFF switch is in the ON position and the ignition switch is ON, have the passenger airbag ON/OFF switch serviced at your authorized Mazda dealership immediately. The passenger side airbag should always be ON (the airbag OFF light should not be illuminated) except for certain vulnerable persons. See guidance on following pages. WARNING: The safety belts for the driver and right front passenger seating positions have been specifically designed to function together with the airbags in certain types of crashes. When you turn OFF your airbag, you not only lose the protection of the airbag, you also may reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt system, which was designed to work with the airbag. Most vehicles with full back seats do not have cut-off switches, but NHTSA and Transport Canada will allow a cut-off switch to be installed on request for a certain category of persons who must ride up front and there is a concern about riding there. Please see the guidance below. WARNING: Always use safety belts and child restraints properly. If a child in a rear facing infant seat must be transported in front, the passenger airbag must be turned OFF. This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the airbag inflates is substantial. The vast majority of drivers and passengers over the age of 12 years are much safer with an airbag than without. To do their job and reduce the risk of life threatening injuries, airbags must open with great force, and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk in some situations, particularly when a front seat occupant is not properly buckled up. The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary airbag injuries without reducing the overall safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained in the vehicle, especially in the front seat. This provides the protection of safety belts and permits the airbags to provide the additional protection they were designed to provide. If you choose to deactivate your airbag, you are losing the very significant risk reducing benefits of the airbag and you are also reducing the 86 PAGE: 86 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 87 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints effectiveness of the safety belts, because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to work as a safety system with the airbags. Read all airbag Warning labels in the vehicle as well as the other important airbag instructions and Warnings in this Owner’s Guide. NHTSA gives permission to install airbag cut-off switches in the following terms: 1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat because: • the vehicle has no rear seat; • the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or • the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition. 2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because: • the vehicle has no rear seat; • although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or • the child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition. 3. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which, according to his or her physician: • causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger; and • makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and allowing the passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash. 87 PAGE: 87 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 88 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING: This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the driver and right front passenger. These particular belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the risk of injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if the airbag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation criteria. Transport Canada gives permission to install airbag cut-off switches in the following terms: 1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat because: • my vehicle has no rear seat; • the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or • the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can monitor the infant’s condition. 2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or under must ride in the front seat because: • my vehicle has no rear seat; • although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever possible, children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient; or • the child has a medical condition that, according to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can monitor the child’s condition. 3. Medical condition: A passenger has a medical condition that, according to his or her physician: • poses a special risk for the passenger if the airbag deploys; and • makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag deployment greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the airbag 88 PAGE: 88 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 89 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING: This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the driver and/or right front passenger. These particular belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the risk of injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if the airbag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the Transport Canada deactivation criteria. CIMS #52677 com_safety-for-kids itdseq=123 SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags. Important child restraint precautions NOTE: You are required by law to use a child-restraint system in the U.S. and Canada. Many states require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. CIMS #683856 com_imp_precautions.mbs itdseq=124 WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. NOTE: Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or child restraint you might use. WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat, position the vehicle seat fully rearward and turn the passenger airbag off. 89 PAGE: 89 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 90 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING: An airbag can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Child seats should never be placed in the front seats, unless passenger airbag switch is turned off, See Passenger airbag on/off switch. WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off. Also, slide the front seat forward until the rear facing child seat contacts the dash board for maximum support. (All other children and forward facing child seats and booster seats should be on front seats that are slid back as far away as possible from the dashboard. WARNING: Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump seat. Children and safety belts CIMS #1065521 com_safety_belts.mbs itdseq=125 If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts. Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle. If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit. 90 PAGE: 90 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 91 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in your vehicle. Leaving a child or an animal unattended in a parked vehicle is dangerous. In hot weather, temperatures inside a vehicle can become high enough to cause brain damage or even death. Always take all children and animals with you or leave a responsible person with them. Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous. This could result in someone being badly injured or even killed. They could play with power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in your vehicle with children. WARNING: Placing a child, 12 years or younger, in the front seat is dangerous. The child could be hit by a deploying airbag and be seriously injured or even killed. Never place a child safety seat in a center facing rear jump seat. If you must place a child safety seat in a front seating position, make sure the passenger airbag is turned off. See Turning the airbag Off in this section. Never use a rear-facing child restraint system in the front seat with an airbag that could deploy. Child booster seats Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh 40 pounds and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, these children are still too small for lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious injury. To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats, Mazda recommends use of a belt-positioning booster. Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably for growing children. When children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about 80 lb. (about 8 to 12 years old). CIMS #992731 com_booster_seat.mazda itdseq=126 91 PAGE: 91 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 92 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions: • Can the child sit all the way back against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat without slouching? art=cgrss526_b • Does the lap belt rest low across the hips? • Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest? • Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? WARNING: Booster seats must be installed only in seating positions equipped with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Types of booster seats There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats: • Those that are backless. If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield and use the lap/shoulder belt. If a seating position has a low seat back and no head restraint, a backless booster seat may place your child’s head (top of ear level) above the top of the seat. In this case, use a high-backed booster seat. art=mbsss109_a 92 PAGE: 92 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 93 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints • Those with a high back. If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child’s head, a high back booster seat would be a better choice. art=mbsss110_a Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb.. The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips, never up high across the stomach. If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition. The importance of shoulder belts Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster seat with combination lap/shoulder belts. WARNING: Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat. WARNING: Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision. WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision. 93 PAGE: 93 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 94 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Child and infant or child safety seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. When installing a child safety seat: • Review and follow the information presented in the Airbag Supplemental Restraint System section in this chapter. • Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from). • Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. CIMS #52706 com_child-seat-title itdseq=127 CIMS #1250809 com_child-safe-seats.mbs2 itdseq=128 art=comss006_a WARNING: Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump seat. • Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling. • Place seat back in upright position. • Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic locking mode (passenger side front seat). • LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to 48 pounds (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used for children up to 60 pounds (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to provide upper torso restraint for children up to 80 pounds (36 kg) using an upper torso harness and a belt-positioning booster. Mazda recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH and 94 PAGE: 94 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 95 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps and anchors, refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. For more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments in this chapter. WARNING: Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. CIMS #1124877 com_install-seat_title.mazda itdseq=129 Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts (front outboard passenger seat only) 1. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt. CIMS #1062868 com_install-seat.mbs itdseq=130 art=f12ss008_a WARNING: If there is a tether on the child safety seat, attach it to the tether anchor point. Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear facing child seat in the right front seat unless the airbag on/off switch is turned OFF. If you place a forward-facing child seat in the right front seat, turn the airbag on/off switch to OFF. See Passenger airbag on/off switch in this chapter. 95 PAGE: 95 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 96 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off. Also, slide the front seat forward until the rear facing child seat contacts the dash board for maximum support. (All other children and forward facing child seats and booster seats should be on front seats that are slid back as far away as possible from the dashboard.) 2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together. 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. art=f12ss009_a art=f12ss010_a art=exdss029_a 96 PAGE: 96 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 97 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints 5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is extracted and a click is heard. art=f12ss012_a 6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Pull the lap belt portion across the child seat toward the buckle and pull up on the shoulder belt while pushing down with knee on the child seat. 8. Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any slack in the belt. 9. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward. There should be no more than one inch of movement for proper installation. 10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps two through nine. 11. See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. art=f12ss013_a art=musss552_b 97 PAGE: 97 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 98 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use. Attaching child safety seats with tether straps CIMS #1062869 com_built-in_anchors.mbs itdseq=131 Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap. The tether anchors in your vehicle are located on the back of the front seat cushion. The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions (shown from top view): • Bucket seats art=ranss564_a • 60/40 seats art=mbsss100_a WARNING: Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor. 98 PAGE: 98 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 99 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING: This anchor information applies to child safety seats equipped with tether straps. For child safety seats equipped with LATCH anchors, refer to Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments for child seat anchors in this chapter. WARNING: Never attach two child safety seat tethers to a single tether anchor. In a crash, on anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death. 1. Position the child safety seat on the front seat cushion. 2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat. art=ranss573_a 3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position. The tether anchor is located on the rear lower portion of the passenger seat. art=ranss574_a 99 PAGE: 99 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 100 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints 4. Clip the tether strap to the anchor. WARNING: If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision. art=ranss575_a art=ranss576_a Center seating location 60/40 seats with folding armrest art=ranss577_a When installing a child safety seat in the center position, route the tether strap over the center arm rest and clip it to the center anchor. 100 PAGE: 100 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 101 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING: If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision. 5. Refer to the Installing child safety seats in combination lap and shoulder belt seating positions section of this chapter for further instructions to secure the child safety seat. 6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions. WARNING: If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases. Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments for child seat anchors CIMS #1054761 com_latch.bseries itdseq=132 Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle. This type of child seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also be attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. Your vehicle may be equipped with LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the following seating positions: art=mbsss104_a • Bucket seats 101 PAGE: 101 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 102 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints art=mbsss105_a • 60/40 seats represents LATCH anchors. represents tether strap anchors. To improve child seat protection, use the tether anchor when using the LATCH to install a child safety seat. See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps in this section. WARNING: Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death. WARNING: Do not put the LATCH type seat in the center seat position — it only has one possible anchor point and the seat will not be properly attached. WARNING: If there are two LATCH seats to install — you can only mount one LATCH seat in this vehicle with the LATCH anchor bars. You need to mount the second seat with the center seat belt using the lap belt method and the child safety seat tether (if equipped). WARNING: Do not attach two seats to one LATCH anchor bar. 102 PAGE: 102 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 103 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints The lower anchors for child seat installation are located at the rear section of the front passenger seat between the cushion and seat back. The LATCH anchors are below locator symbols on the seat back. Two plastic LATCH guides may be purchased from your local Mazda dealer (part number 1F60–57–751). They snap onto the latch lower anchor in the vehicle to help attach a child seat with rigid latch attachments. It will hold the seat foam away and expose the anchor making attachment of the child seat easier. Make sure you attach the proper child safety seat tether after securing the LATCH. art=vilss601_a WARNING: If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision. Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments. WARNING: Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown. If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash. Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child 103 PAGE: 103 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 104 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Seating and Safety Restraints seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if the anchors hold the seat in place. WARNING: If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases. WARNING: If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision. 104 PAGE: 104 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 105 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading CIMS #1434023 com_drive-veh-utility itdseq=133 NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets, highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. art=supfw007_a WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must: • Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers; • Drive at safe speeds for the conditions; • Keep tires properly inflated; • Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and • Make sure every passenger is properly restrained. WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants must wear safety belts and children/infants must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection. Study your Owner’s Guide and any supplements for specific information about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury. VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS 4WD and AWD Systems (if equipped) A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD (when selected) has the ability to use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. CIMS #1434024 com_veh-handle-title itdseq=134 CIMS #1434025 com_veh-system itdseq=135 105 PAGE: 105 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 106 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow you to select different drive modes as necessary. Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be found in the Driving chapter. Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle. On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to speed and is not cause for concern. art=supfw001_a WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD and AWD vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may accelerate better than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed. How your vehicle differs from other vehicles SUV and trucks can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be: • Higher – to allow higher load carrying capacity and to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. • Shorter – to give it the capability to approach inclines and drive over the crest of a hill without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. All other things held equal, a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase. CIMS #1434026 com_veh-dr-differs itdseq=136 art=supfw010_a 106 PAGE: 106 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 107 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading • Narrower — to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces, particularly in off-road use. As a result of the above dimensional differences, SUV’s and trucks often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition. These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car. art=supfw009_a INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING New vehicles are fitted with tires that have a rating on them called Tire Quality Grades. The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: • Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set. Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2). U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Mazda to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. CIMS #599889 com_tire_grade_info.j14 itdseq=137 Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one CIMS #54583 com_treads.01 itdseq=138 art=f12mc027_b 107 PAGE: 107 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 108 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA A B C The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. NOTE: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. CIMS #599890 com_traction_a-b-c.j14 itdseq=139 Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. CIMS #600046 com_temp_a-b-c.j14 itdseq=140 WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. TIRES Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them. CIMS #1272072 com_tire-intro Glossary of tire terminology • Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry. CIMS #1272100 com_glossary-of-tire-terms itdseq=142 itdseq=141 108 PAGE: 108 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 109 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading • Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. • Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire. • Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability. • Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability. • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure. • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure. • Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km). • Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. • B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door. • Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim. • Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread. • Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle. • Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. CIMS #1444637 com_gen-tire-ins.mazda itdseq=143 INSPECTING AND INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat. 109 PAGE: 109 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 110 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required. At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Mazda. Inflating your tires Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare (if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate. Mazda recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge. Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns. NOTE: If you are driving the vehicle at its maximum weight load, make sure the tire inflation pressure is correct for the weight load on the tires. art=ecomc021_b CIMS #1302691 com_tire-inflate-mazda itdseq=144 WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or (blowout(, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat! Always inflate your tires to the Mazda recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire. The Mazda recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles. 110 PAGE: 110 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 111 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufactures’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the structure by the trailing edge of the driver’s door or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also change. A 10° F (6° C) temperature drop causes a corresponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated. To check the pressure in your tire(s): 1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile. Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive. Never “bleed” or reduce air pressure when tires are hot. 2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure. 3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge. 4. Replace the valve cap. 5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare. Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see T-Type/Mini-Spare Tire Information section for description): Store and maintain at 60psi (4.15 bars). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see Dissimilar Spare 111 PAGE: 111 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 112 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label. 6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak. 7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges. TIRE CARE Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist: Inspecting your tires Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from the tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail. Tire wear When the tread is worn down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear indicators, or “wear bars”, which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm). When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be replaced. Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and CIMS #1272124 com_care-for-tires itdseq=145 CIMS #1444638 com_tire-inspection itdseq=146 CIMS #1272512 com_tire-wear itdseq=147 art=tsnmc001_a CIMS #1512511 com_tire-damage itdseq=148 112 PAGE: 112 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 113 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also recommended. Age Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used. It is recommended that tires generally be replaced after 6 years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. You should replace the spare tire when you replace the other road tires due to the aging of the spare tire. CIMS #1512512 com_tire-age itdseq=149 Safety practices Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. • Observe posted speed limits • Avoid fast starts, stops and turns • Avoid potholes and objects on the road • Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking CIMS #1272513 com_tire-safety-practices itdseq=150 WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds. WARNING: Never spin the tires in excess of the 35 mph (55 km/h) point indicated on the speedometer. Highway hazards No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but your safety is more important. If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If 113 PAGE: 113 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 114 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected. Tire and wheel alignment CIMS #1302692 com_tire-align-mazda itdseq=151 A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your vehicle seems to pull to one side, vibrate or shake when you’re driving, the wheels may be out of alignment. Have a qualified technician at a Mazda dealer check the wheel alignment periodically. Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by a qualified technician at a Mazda dealer. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension require alignment of all four wheels. The tire should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear. NOTE: When it is time to replace front tires with new ones, this is an ideal time to perform an alignment. New tires should be balanced at the time they are installed. Tire rotation CIMS #1350081 com_rotate-tires-mazda itdseq=152 Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the Scheduled maintenance section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life. 114 PAGE: 114 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 115 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading • Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles (front tires at top of diagram) art=f23mc121_a 115 PAGE: 115 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 116 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading • Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) vehicles/Four Wheel Drive (4WD)/All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles (front tires at top of diagram) art=f23mc122_a Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires. Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask a qualified technician at a Mazda dealership to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation. Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation. Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements. TIRE REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS CIMS #1348871 com_tire-replace-req itdseq=153 Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability. 116 PAGE: 116 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 117 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided by Mazda. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Mazda can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an authorized dealer. Important: Remember to replace the valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle. It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair. CIMS #1296916 com_sidewall-info itdseq=154 INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall. CIMS #1272097 com_pass-tire-information itdseq=155 Information on “P” type tires P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size, load index and speed rating. The definitions of these items are listed below. (Note that the tire size, load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example.) 1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA), that may be used for service on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks. Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it art=f23mc119_a 117 PAGE: 117 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 118 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading is designated by either ETRTO (European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing Association). 2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire. 3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to width. 4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire. 5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter. 6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer. Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law. 7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart. Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law. Letter rating M N Q R S T U H Speed rating - mph (km/h) 81 mph (130 km/h) 87 mph (140 km/h) 99 mph (159 km/h) 106 mph (171 km/h) 112 mph (180 km/h) 118 mph (190 km/h) 124 mph (200 km/h) 130 mph (210 km/h) 118 PAGE: 118 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 119 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h) V 149 mph (240 km/h) W 168 mph (270 km/h) Y 186 mph (299 km/h) Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR. 8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall. 9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or AT: All Terrain, or AS: All Season. 10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. 11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle. 12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades • Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. • Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement 119 PAGE: 119 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 120 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. • Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. 13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label. The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load, radial tubeless, etc. Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type tires “LT” type tires have some additional information beyond those of “P” type tires; these differences are described below: 1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA), that is intended for service on light trucks. 2. Load Range/Load Inflation Limits: Indicates the tire’s load-carrying capabilities and its inflation limits. 3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle). 4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single; defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle. CIMS #1272098 com_lt-tire-information itdseq=156 art=f23mc120_b 120 PAGE: 120 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 121 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading Information on “T” type tires “T” type tires have some additional information beyond those of “P” type tires; these differences are described below: T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size. Note: The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example. 1. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA), that is intended for temporary service on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks. 2. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire. 3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall. 4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire. 5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter. Location of the tire label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section. SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS CIMS #1280261 com_t-tire-information itdseq=157 art=f23mc123_b CIMS #1450451 com_placard-loc-ref itdseq=158 CIMS # com_snow_tires_chains.mbs itdseq=159 WARNING: Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle components. 121 PAGE: 121 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 122 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading NOTE: Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you currently have on your vehicle. The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow tires and chains. If you need to use snow tires and chains, it is recommended that steel wheels are used of the same size and specifications as those originally installed. Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains: • Do not use tire chains on aluminum wheels. Chains may chip the wheels. • Use only SAE Class S chains. • Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines. Drive cautiously. Ensure you obtain the proper cables or chains for you vehicle. Test fit the cables or chains before using them in snow and/or ice. If you hear the cables or chains rub or bang against the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If this does not work, remove the cables or chains to prevent vehicle damage. Have the cables or chains fitted by a professional before proceeding. • If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle. • Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. • The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains. VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s Safety Compliance Certification Label: Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment. Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment. CIMS #1355516 com_load-label-def itdseq=160 122 PAGE: 122 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 123 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading art=f23gf110_b Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door (vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload. WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover. 123 PAGE: 123 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 124 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading Example only: art=f23gf111_d art=f23gf117_b art=f23gf112_b Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight. 124 PAGE: 124 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 125 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR. WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label axle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury. Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer. art=f23gf113_b GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo + passengers. 125 PAGE: 125 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 126 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR. art=f23gf114_b WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury. art=f23gf115_c GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle (GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer. GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage. (Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The GCW must never exceed the GCWR. 126 PAGE: 126 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 127 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of 10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer) for more detailed information. Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch. Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000 by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb. (227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to 2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg) WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations. WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury. Steps for determining the correct load limit: 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, 127 PAGE: 127 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 128 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity: • Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 – (5 x 220) – (5 x 30) = 1400 – 1100 – 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg — (5 x 99 kg) — (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 — 495 — 67.5 = 72.5 kg. • A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 – (2 x 220) – (12 x 100) = 1400 – 440 – 1200 = – 240 lb. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg — (2 x 99 kg) — (12 x 45 kg) = 635 — 198 — 540 = —103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then the load calculation would be: 1400 – (2 x 220) – (9 x 100) = 1400 – 440 – 900 = 60 lb. Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. . In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg — (2 x 99 kg) — (9 x 45 kg) = 635 — 198 — 405 = 32 kg. The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross 128 PAGE: 128 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 129 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door. CIMS #954537 com_loading-warnings.fly itdseq=161 Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and utility-type vehicles WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in the Driving chapter of this Owner’s Guide. WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle. TRAILER TOWING Your vehicle may tow a class I, II or III trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts. Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle. Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these components carefully after any towing operation. Engine 2.3L 4x2 w/manual transmission Rear axle Maximum Maximum ratio GCWR - lb. trailer (kg) weight - lb. (kg) Regular Cab All 4,800 (2,177) 1,600 (726) CIMS #101936 com_towing.title itdseq=162 CIMS #685186 com_towing.bseries itdseq=163 Maximum frontal area of trailer ft2 (m2) Equal to frontal area of vehicle 129 PAGE: 129 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 130 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading Engine 3.0L* 3.0L* Dual Sport 2.3L 4x2 w/manual transmission Rear axle Maximum Maximum Maximum ratio GCWR - lb. trailer frontal area (kg) weight - lb. of trailer (kg) ft2 (m2) 3.73 6,000 (2,722) 2,680 (1,216) 50 (4.64) 4.10 6,000 (2,722) 2,540 (1,152) 50 (4.64) All Cab Plus/Cab Plus 4 4,800 (2,177) 1,440 (653) Equal to frontal area of vehicle 50 (4.64) 50 (4.64) 3.0L* 3.73 6,000 (2,722) 2,480 (1,125) 3.0L* 4.10 6,000 (2,722) 2,380 (1,080) Dual Sport 4.0L All 7,000 (3,175) 3,420 (1,551) 50 (4.64) 4.0L Dual All 7,000 (3,175) 3,300 (1,497) 50 (4.64) Sport For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300 meters) elevation. *When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases. For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier in this chapter. To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular vehicle, see Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow earlier in this chapter. Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). 130 PAGE: 130 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 131 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading Engine 2.3L 4x2 w/manual transmission Rear axle Maximum Maximum ratio GCWR - lb. trailer (kg) weight - lb. (kg) Regular Cab All 4,800 (2,177) 1,600 (726) 3.0L* 3.0L* Dual Sport 3.73 4.10 2.3L All 6,000 (2,722) 6,000 (2,722) 2,660 (1,206) 2,500 (1,134) Cab Plus/Cab Plus 4 4,800 (2,177) 1,440 (653) Maximum frontal area of trailer ft2 (m2) Equal to frontal area of vehicle 50 (4.64) 50 (4.64) Equal to frontal area of vehicle 50 (4.64) 50 (4.64) 3.0L* 3.73 6,000 (2,722) 2,500 (1,134) 3.0L* 4.10 6,000 (2,722) 2,380 (1,080) Dual Sport 4.0L All 7,000 (3,175) 3,440 (1,560) 50 (4.64) 4.0L Dual All 7,000 (3,175) 3,320 (1,506) 50 (4.64) Sport For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300 meters) elevation. *When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases. For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier in this chapter. To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular vehicle, see Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow earlier in this chapter. 131 PAGE: 131 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 132 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading 4x2 w/manual transmission Rear axle Maximum Maximum Maximum ratio GCWR - lb. trailer frontal area (kg) weight - lb. of trailer (kg) ft2 (m2) Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). Engine 4x4 w/manual transmission Rear axle Maximum Maximum Maximum ratio GCWR - lb. trailer frontal area (kg) weight - lb. of trailer (kg) ft2 (m2) Regular Cab 3.0L* All 6,000 (2,722) 2,360 (1,070) 50 (4.64) 50 (4.64) 4.0L All 7,000 (3,175) 3,280 (1,487) Cab Plus/Cab Plus 4 50 (4.64) 4.0L All 7,000 (3,175) 3,140 (1,424) For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300 meters) of elevation. *When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases. For definition of terms used in this table, see Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter. To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your vehicle, see Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow earlier in this chapter. Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). Engine 132 PAGE: 132 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 133 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading Engine 2.3L 3.0L* 3.0L* Dual Sport 4x2 w/automatic transmission Rear axle Maximum Maximum Maximum ratio GCWR - lb. trailer frontal area (kg) weight - lb. of trailer (kg) ft2 (m2) Regular Cab All 5,500 (2,495) 2,260 (1,025) Equal to frontal area of vehicle 2,620 (1,188) 50 (4.64) 3.73 6,000 (2,722) 2,460 (1,115) 50 (4.64) 4.10 6,000 (2,722) Cab Plus/Cab Plus 4 2,460 (1,115) 50 (4.64) 3.0L* 3.73 6,000 (2,722) 3.0L* 4.10 6,000 (2,722) 2,340 (1,061) 50 (4.64) Dual Sport 5,880 (2,667) 50 (4.64) 4.0L All 9,500 (4,309) 4.0L Dual All 9,500 (4,309) 5,760 (2,612) 50 (4.64) Sport For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300 meters) elevation. *When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases. For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier in this chapter. To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular vehicle, see Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow earlier in this chapter. 133 PAGE: 133 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 134 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading 4x2 w/automatic transmission Rear axle Maximum Maximum Maximum ratio GCWR - lb. trailer frontal area (kg) weight - lb. of trailer (kg) ft2 (m2) Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). Engine 4x4 w/automatic transmission Rear axle Maximum Maximum Maximum ratio GCWR - lb. trailer frontal area (kg) weight - lb. of trailer (kg) ft2 (m2) Regular Cab 50 (4.64) 3.0L* 3.73 6,000 (2,722) 2,320 (1,052) 4.0L All 9,500 (4,309) 5,740 (2,603) 50 (4.64) Cab Plus/Cab Plus 4 50 (4.64) 4.0L All 9,500 (4,309) 5,600 (2,540) For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300 meters) of elevation. *When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases. For definition of terms used in this table, see Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter. To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your vehicle, see Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow earlier in this chapter. Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). Engine 134 PAGE: 134 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 135 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. The certification label is found on the driver’s door latch pillar. WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury. Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized dealer or a reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance. Hitches For towing trailers up to 2,000 lb. (907 kg), use a weight carrying hitch and ball which uniformly distributes the trailer tongue loads through the underbody structure. Use a frame-mounted weight distributing hitch for trailers over 2,000 lb. (907 kg). Do not install a single or multi-clamp type bumper hitch, or a hitch which attaches to the axle. Underbody mounted hitches are acceptable if they are installed properly. Follow the towing instructions of a reputable rental agency. Whenever a trailer hitch and hardware are removed, make sure all mounting holes in the underbody are properly sealed to prevent noxious gases or water from entering. Safety chains Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners. If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you. Do not attach safety chains to the bumper. Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations. CIMS #53196 com_prep-and-hitches itdseq=164 CIMS #710091 com_hitches.mbs itdseq=165 CIMS #81316 com_safety-chains itdseq=166 CIMS #81317 com_trailer-brakes itdseq=167 135 PAGE: 135 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 136 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR. Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps. CIMS #81318 com_trailer-lamps itdseq=168 Using a step bumper The optional step bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and requires only a ball with a 3/4 inch (19 mm) shank diameter. The bumper has a 2,000 lb. (907 kg) trailer weight and 200 lb. (91 kg) tongue weight capability. The rated capacities (as shown in this guide) for trailer towing with the factory bumper are only valid when the trailer hitch ball is installed directly into the ball hole in the bumper. Addition of bracketry to either lower the ball hitch position or extend the ball hitch rearward will significantly increase the loads on the bumper and its attachments. This can result in the failure of the bumper or the bumper attachments. Use of any type of hitch extensions should be considered abuse. CIMS #710092 com_use-step-bumper.mbs itdseq=169 Trailer tow connector The trailer tow connector is located under the rear bumper, on the driver’s side of the vehicle. CIMS #476432 com_towconnect.ran itdseq=170 art=ranmc721_a 1 2 4 3 Refer to the following chart for information regarding the factory-equipped trailer tow connector: 136 PAGE: 136 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 137 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading Trailer tow connector Color Function 1. Dark Green Trailer right-hand turn signal 2. Yellow Trailer left-hand turn signal 3. Tan/White Tail lamp 4. White Ground Comment Circuit activated when brake pedal is depressed or when ignition is on and right-hand turn signal is applied. Circuit activated when brake pedal is depressed or when ignition is on and left-hand turn signal is applied. Relay controlled circuit activated when the park lamps/headlamps are on. Matching vehicle circuit returns to battery’s negative ground. Driving while you tow When towing a trailer: • Keep your speed no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h), and don’t make full throttle starts. • Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades. • Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer. • To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission section in the Driving chapter.) • Under extreme conditions with large frontal trailers, high outside temperatures and highway speeds, the coolant gauge may indicate higher than normal coolant temperatures. If this occurs, reduce speed until the coolant temperature returns to the normal range. Refer to Engine coolant temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster chapter. • Anticipate stops and brake gradually. • Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur. CIMS #1514926 com_drivin-while-you-tow.mbs itdseq=171 137 PAGE: 137 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 138 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals. Refer to your service maintenance section for more information. Trailer towing tips • Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles. • Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. • The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer weight. • If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly conditions, at GCW, or any combination of these factors, consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so equipped. Refer to the Maintenance and specifications chapter for the lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axle lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of a new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done at no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) with no full throttle starts. • After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts. • To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or N (Neutral) (manual transmissions). • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels. CIMS #83488 com_towing-tips.02 itdseq=172 Launching or retrieving a boat Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed from the water. When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval: • do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. • do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components: CIMS #81391 com_launch-retrieving_boat.1 itdseq=173 138 PAGE: 138 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 139 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading • causing internal damage to the components. • affecting driveability, emissions and reliability. Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required. RECREATIONAL TOWING Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing. An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged. Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission: Note: 4x2 and 4x4 vehicles with a manual transmission follow these guidelines for recreational towing: Before you have your vehicle towed: • Release the parking brake. • Move the gearshift to the neutral position. • Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position. • The maximum recommended speed is 55 mph (88 km/h). • The maximum recommended distance is unlimited. • Put 4x4 switch in 2WD mode (4x4 only) • The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no damage is done to the internal transmission components. In addition, it is recommended that you follow the instructions provided by the aftermarket manufacturer of the towing apparatus if one has been installed. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission 4x2 and 4x4 vehicles with an automatic transmission follow these guidelines for recreational towing: • Release the parking brake. • Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position. • Place the transmission in N (Neutral). • Do not exceed a distance of 50 miles (80 km). • Do not exceed 35 mph (56 km/h) vehicle speed. • Put 4x4 switch in 2WD mode (4x4 only) CIMS #555656 com_recreational-towing.ran itdseq=174 139 PAGE: 139 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 140 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Tires, Wheels and Loading • The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no damage is done to the internal transfer case components. If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must be exceeded, you must disconnect the front (4x4 only) and rear driveshafts. Mazda recommends the driveshafts be removed/installed only by a qualified technician at an authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for driveshaft removal/installation. Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause transmission fluid or transfer case fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal transmission and transfer case components. CAMPER BODIES Your pickup is not recommended for slide–in camper bodies. CIMS #695136 com_no-camper.bseries itdseq=175 140 PAGE: 140 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 141 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving STARTING CIMS #727778 com_starting-title itdseq=176 Positions of the ignition 1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical accessories such as 4 the radio to operate while the 3 engine is not running. 5 2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel, automatic transmission gearshift 2 lever and allows key removal. 3. OFF, shuts off the engine and 1 all accessories without locking the steering wheel. This position also allows the automatic transmission shift lever to be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal being depressed. CIMS #77457 com_ignition_positions.04 itdseq=177 art=exdto300_a WARNING: When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always set the parking brake. 4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key position when driving. 5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine starts. CIMS #1129631 com_starting-vehicle.mbs itdseq=178 Preparing to start your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. Note: This system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise. When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter. 141 PAGE: 141 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 142 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions. WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. Important safety precautions CIMS #684692 com_imp-precautions.mbs itdseq=179 When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle checked. Before starting the vehicle: 1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. 2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off. If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission: 142 PAGE: 142 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 143 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving • Make sure the parking brake is set. art=unogf300_f • Make sure the gearshift is in P (Park). art=rangf120_a If starting a vehicle with a manual transmission: 1. Make sure the parking brake is set. 2. Push the clutch pedal to the floor. art=ctogf111_a 3. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without turning the key to 5 (START). art=exdto300_a 4 3 5 2 1 If there is difficulty in turning the key, firmly rotate the steering wheel left and right until the key turns freely. This condition may occur when: • front wheels are turned • front wheel is against the curb • steering wheel is turned when getting in or out of the vehicle 143 PAGE: 143 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 144 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information regarding the warning lights. Starting the engine Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter. 1. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without turning the key to 5 (START). If 4 there is difficulty in turning the 3 key, rotate the steering wheel 5 until the key turns freely. This condition may occur when: 2 • the front wheels are turned • a front wheel is against the curb 1 Turn the key to 5 (START), then release the key as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter. Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel. CIMS #1129632 com_start.mbs If the engine fails to start using the preceding instructions (flexible fuel vehicles only) 1. Press and hold down the accelerator 1/3 to 1/2 way to floor, then crank the engine. 2. When the engine starts, release the key, then gradually release the accelerator pedal as the engine speeds up. If the engine still fails to start, repeat Step 1. CIMS #412567 com_no-start.01 itdseq=181 Guarding against exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. CIMS #954491 com_guarding-fumes.fly itdseq=182 itdseq=180 art=f12st004_b WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. 144 PAGE: 144 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 145 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in fresh air. CIMS #954493 com_ventilation.fly itdseq=183 USING THE ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED) An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting and heater/defroster performance. Use of an engine block heater is strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach -10°F (-23°C) or below. For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before starting the vehicle. The heater can be plugged in the night before starting the vehicle. CIMS #954489 com_engine-block-heater.fly itdseq=184 WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. BRAKES Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer. Refer to Brake system warning ! P light in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the brake BRAKE system warning light. CIMS #954495 com_brake_info.fly itdseq=185 Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS) This vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS), a noise from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be observed during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’s anti-lock brake system. NOTE: The ABS performs a self-check after you start the engine and begin to drive away. A brief mechanical noise may be heard during this test. This is normal. If a malfunction is found, the ABS warning light will come on. If the vehicle CIMS #713206 com_abs_info.mbs itdseq=186 art=dnogf004_a 145 PAGE: 145 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 146 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer. The ABS operates by detecting the onset of wheel lockup during brake applications and compensates for this tendency. The wheels are prevented from locking even when the brakes are firmly applied. The accompanying illustration depicts the advantage of an ABS equipped vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking traction. art=comss004_a WARNING: The Anti-Lock system does not decrease the time necessary to apply the brakes or always reduce stopping distance. Always leave enough room between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to stop. Using ABS When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain full steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However, the ABS does not decrease stopping distance. CIMS #954499 com_abs_use.fly itdseq=187 ABS warning lamp The ABS lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates ABS when the ignition is turned on. If the light does not illuminate during start up, remains on or flashes, the ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced. Even when the ABS is disabled, ! P normal braking is still effective. (If your BRAKE warning lamp BRAKE illuminates with the parking brake released, have your brake system serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.) CIMS #954498 com_abs_warn.fly itdseq=188 art=dnogf001_a art=dnogf004_a 146 PAGE: 146 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 147 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving Parking brake Apply the parking brake whenever the vehicle is parked. To set the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops. The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and remains illuminated (when the ignition is turned ON) until the parking brake is released. CIMS #684693 com_park_brake.mbs itdseq=189 BRAKE RELEASE art=unogf300_c ! P BRAKE art=dnogf004_a WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission). NOTE: The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle. However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected. BRAKE Pull the release lever to release the RELEASE brake. Driving with the parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear out quickly and reduce fuel economy. art=unogf301_b 147 PAGE: 147 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 148 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving STEERING CIMS #244756 com_steering.04 itdseq=190 Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy from the engine to decrease the driver’s effort in steering the vehicle. To prevent damage to the power steering pump: • Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left for more than a few seconds when the engine is running. • Do not operate the vehicle with the power steering pump fluid level below the MIN mark on the reservoir. If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort. If the steering wanders or pulls, check for: • Underinflated tire(s) on any wheel(s) • Uneven vehicle loading • High crown in center of road • High crosswinds • Wheels out of alignment • Loose or worn suspension components TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED) This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed. This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working. CIMS #954505 com_axle-statement.fly itdseq=191 PREPARING TO DRIVE CIMS #954507 com_prep-to-drive.fly itdseq=192 WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt. Your vehicle has larger tires and increased ground clearance, giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car. 148 PAGE: 148 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 149 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. WARNING: Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) Brake-shift interlock This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed. If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed: 1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the key. 2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift to N (Neutral) . CIMS #197246 com_auto-trans.ie itdseq=193 CIMS #1124643 com_bsi.mbs itdseq=194 art=mbsto300_a WARNING: When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always set the parking brake. 149 PAGE: 149 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 150 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving 3. Start the vehicle. If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever, it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter. WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working. WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. See your authorized dealer. 150 PAGE: 150 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 151 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving CIMS #1129633 com_5r55e.mbs itdseq=195 Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission (if equipped) art=rangf120_a This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy. Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected for any type of service or repair, the transmission will need to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected. The Adaptive Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating parameters. This learning process could take several transmission upshifts and downshifts; during this learning process, slightly firmer shifts may occur. After this learning process, normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume. WARNING: Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever from P (Park) to another position. If you do not hold the brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. P (Park) This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning. To put your vehicle in gear: • Start the engine • Depress the brake pedal • Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P (Park): • Come to a complete stop • Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park) WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. 151 PAGE: 151 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 152 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving R (Reverse) With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R (Reverse). N (Neutral) With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position. (Overdrive) The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission O/D ON/OFF operates in gears one through (Overdrive) can be five. deactivated by pressing the transmission control switch on the end of the gearshift lever. This will illuminate the O/D OFF O/D lamp and activate Drive. OFF art=rangf110_a art=expis024_a Drive (not shown) Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed. • This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive. • O/D OFF lamp is illuminated. • Provides engine braking. • Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer towing and when engine braking is required. • To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control switch. The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated. • O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned off. 2 (Second) Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional engine braking on downgrades. 1 (First) • Provides maximum engine braking. • Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever. 152 PAGE: 152 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 153 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving • Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First) when vehicle reaches slower speeds. Forced downshifts • Allowed in (Overdrive) or Drive. • Depress the accelerator to the floor. • Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear. CIMS #72083 itdseq=196 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) com_manual art=ctogf101_b 1 3 5 2 4 R Using the clutch The manual transmission has a starter interlock that prevents cranking the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. To start the vehicle: 1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set. 2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, then put the gearshift lever in the neutral position. 3. Start the engine, then press the brake pedal and release the parking brake. 4. Move the gearshift lever to 1st gear, then slowly release the clutch pedal while slowly pressing on the accelerator. During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully depressed to the floor. Failure to fully depress the clutch pedal to the floor may cause increased shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission components or damage the transmission. Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn’t interfere with the full extension of the clutch pedal. Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill. These actions will reduce the life of the clutch. CIMS #72084 com_using_clutch.rwd itdseq=197 Recommended shift speeds Downshift according to the following charts for your specific engine/drivetrain combination: CIMS #1124644 com_shift-speeds.mbs itdseq=198 153 PAGE: 153 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 154 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving Upshifts Transfer case position (if equipped) Shift from: 2WD and 4H 4L 1 -2 10 mph (16 km/h) 4 mph (6 km/h) 2-3 19 mph (26 km/h) 8 mph (10 km/h) 3-4 28 mph (43 km/h) 12 mph (16 km/h) 4 - 5 (Overdrive) 40 mph (68 km/h) 16 mph (26 km/h) Maximum downshift speeds Transfer case position (if equipped) Shift from: 2WD and 4H 4L 5 (Overdrive) - 4 55 mph (88 km/h) 22 mph (34 km/h) 4-3 45 mph (72 km/h) 18 mph (27 km/h) 3-2 35 mph (56 km/h) 14 mph (21 km/h) 2-1 20 mph (32 km/h) 8 mph (11 km/h) Reverse CIMS #1035364 com_reverse.uno itdseq=199 1. Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift into R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission. 2. Move the gearshift lever into the neutral position and wait at least three seconds before shifting into R (Reverse). • The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving it from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse). This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from accidentally being shifted into R (Reverse) from 5 (Overdrive). Parking your vehicle CIMS #72086 com_parking.rwd itdseq=200 1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position. 2. Fully apply the parking brake, then shift into 1 (First). 3. Turn the ignition off. WARNING: Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake fully. 154 PAGE: 154 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 155 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving CIMS #1035362 com_remove-key itdseq=201 Removing the key Turn the ignition off, push the release lever (located above the ignition), then turn the key toward you and remove the key. art=rangf114_a PUSH If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat. CIMS #1058177 com_rocking-vehicle itdseq=202 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) CIMS #73625 itdseq=203 com_four_wd WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter. Four–wheel drive (4WD) supplies power to all four wheels. 4WD should not be operated on dry pavement; driveline damage may occur. If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and 4WD Low is selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WD system will not engage. This is normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4WD Low for proper operation. 4WD system indicator lights • 4x4 - Momentarily illuminates when the vehicle is started. Illuminates when 4H (4WD High) is engaged. CIMS #1114726 com_4wd-lights.ran2003 itdseq=204 4x4 art=f12ip031_a 155 PAGE: 155 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 156 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving • 4x4 LOW – Momentarily illuminates when the vehicle is started. Illuminates when 4L (4WD Low) is engaged. 4x4 LOW Using the electronic shift 4WD system (if equipped) 2WD 4X4 HIGH 4X4 LOW art=expis340_a CIMS #1124645 com_electronic-4wd.mbs itdseq=205 art=rangf107_c 2WD - Power to the rear wheels only; used for street and highway driving. 4X4 HIGH - Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy roads or in off-road situations. Not intended for use on dry pavement. 4X4 LOW - Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all four wheels. Intended only for off-road applications such as deep sand, steep grades or pulling heavy objects. 4X4 LOW will not engage while the vehicle is moving; this is normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4X4 for proper operation. Shifting between 2WD and 4X4 HIGH • Move the 4WD control between 2WD and 4X4 HIGH at any forward speed. Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping. Shifting to/from 4X4 LOW 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2. Depress the brake 3. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, place the transmission in N (Neutral); on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, depress the clutch. 4. Move the 4WD control to the desired position. • If shifting into 4X4 LOW, wait for the 4WD LOW light in the instrument cluster to turn on indicating the shift is complete. 156 PAGE: 156 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 157 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving • If shifting out of 4X4 LOW, wait for the 4WD LOW light in the instrument cluster to turn off indicating the shift is complete. CIMS #83537 com_driving-offroad.02 itdseq=206 Driving off-road with 4WD Your vehicle is specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough terrain and has operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road. How your vehicle differs from other vehicles Trucks and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car. Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain. Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes. Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning. Basic operating principles • Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components. 4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces. • Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle. • Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice. If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement • If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface. 157 PAGE: 157 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 158 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving • It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly. • It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern. WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If your vehicle gets stuck If the vehicle is stuck it may be rocked out by shifting from forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat. WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. Emergency maneuvers • In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e., turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control, not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or 158 PAGE: 158 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 159 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel. • In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements. WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. • If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again, avoid these abrupt inputs. Sand When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail. Do not reduce the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels. Mud and water If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake capability may be limited. When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall. Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to the driveshafts and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components. 159 PAGE: 159 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 160 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water, their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary. Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage. Replace rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in water. The rear axle does not normally require a lubricant change for the life of the vehicle. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair is required. Driving on hilly or sloping terrain When driving on a hill, avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes. You could lose traction and slip sideways. Drive straight up, straight down or avoid the hill completely. Know the conditions on the other side of a hill before driving over the crest. When climbing a steep hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling. When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden braking. Shift to a lower gear when added engine braking is desired. When speed control is on and you are driving uphill, your vehicle speed may drop considerably, especially if you are carrying a heavy load. If vehicle speed drops more than 10 mph (16 km/h), the speed control will cancel automatically. Resume speed with accelerator pedal. If speed control cancels after climbing the hill, reset speed by pressing and holding the SET ACCEL button (to resume speeds over 30 mph [50 km/h]). Automatic transmissions may shift frequently while driving up steep grades. Eliminate frequent shifting by shifting out of (Overdrive) into a lower gear. Driving on snow and ice A 4WD vehicle has advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle. Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop. When braking, apply the brakes as you normally would. In order to allow the anti-lock brake system (ABS) to operate properly, keep steady pressure on the brake pedal. 160 PAGE: 160 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 161 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Driving Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears. CIMS #954533 com_deep-water.fly itdseq=207 DRIVING THROUGH WATER If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very slowly especially when the depth is not known. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of the hubs (for trucks). art=taumc713_b When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited. Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage. Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes. 161 PAGE: 161 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 162 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies HAZARD FLASHER The hazard flasher is located on the steering column, just behind the steering wheel. The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in any position or if the key is not in the ignition. Push in the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash. Press the flasher control again to turn them off. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. CIMS # com_hazard-flasher-info itdseq=208 art=rancf500_a Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery. FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH CIMS #1296506 com_fuel-pump-shutoff.ran itdseq=209 This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt. After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch may have been activated. 162 PAGE: 162 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 163 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies The fuel pump shut-off switch is located under the right-hand side of the glove box, just above the carpet. To reset the switch: 1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Check the fuel system for leaks. 3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the switch by pushing in on the reset button. 4. Turn the ignition ON. 5. Wait a few seconds and return the key to OFF. 6. Make another check for leaks. art=raner102_c FUSES AND RELAYS CIMS #55291 com_fuses-relays.01 itdseq=210 Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components. CIMS #55297 itdseq=211 com_fuse.01 art=dnoer001_c 15 Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. 163 PAGE: 163 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 164 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies CIMS #55301 com_fuse_amp_rating.01 itdseq=212 Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Fuse rating Mini fuses Standard fuses Maxi fuses 2A 3A 4A 5A 7.5A 10A 15A 20A 25A 30A 40A 50A 60A 70A 80A Grey Violet Pink Tan Brown Red Blue Yellow Natural Green — — — — — Grey Violet Pink Tan Brown Red Blue Yellow Natural Green — — — — — — — — — — — — Yellow — Green Orange Red Blue Tan Natural Passenger compartment fuse panel The fuse panel is located under the right-hand side of the instrument panel behind the kick panel. A fuse puller tool is located near the top left corner of the fuse box; this tool will assist you in pulling the fuses out for inspection, if necessary. Cartridge Fuse link maxi cartridge fuses — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Blue Blue — — Pink Pink Green Green Red Red — Yellow — Brown — Black CIMS #1252347 com_passenger-title.ran itdseq=213 art=raner523_a 164 PAGE: 164 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 165 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies CIMS #683868 com_passenger-mbs itdseq=214 art=raner505_c The fuses are coded as follows: Fuse/Relay Location 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Fuse Amp Rating 5A 10A 10A 10A 30A 10A 5A 10A 9 10 5A 10A Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description Instrument panel dimmer switch Trailer tow park lamps Right low beam headlamp Left low beam headlamp Windshield wipers/washer Radio (RUN/ACCY) Headlamp switch illumination Restraints Control Module (RCM), PADI (Passenger Air bag Deactivation Indicator) Cluster air bag indicator Cluster (RUN/START), 4x4 module (RUN/START) 165 PAGE: 165 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 166 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies Fuse/Relay Location 11 Fuse Amp Rating 10A 12 13 14 — 15A 15A 15 16 17 18 19 — 30A cartridge fuse 15A — 20A 20 10A 21 22 5A 5A 23 24 25 26 27 30A 20A — 2A 10A 28 29 15A 20A 30 5A Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description Smart Junction Box (SJB) (Logic power) Not used Horn, Interior lamps High beam headlamp, High beam indicator (cluster) One-touch down relay Power windows Turn signals/Hazards Not used Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)/Stop lamps Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module, Brake-shift interlock, Speed control module, Back-up lamps, Overdrive cancel switch, Electronic flasher (turn/hazard) Starter relay coil Radio (START), 4x4 Neutral sense (manual only) Headlamps (low and high beam) Radio battery feed (B+) Accessory relay Brake pressure switch Climate control blower relay/blend doors, 4x4 module 4x4 module battery feed (B+) Cigar lighter, Diagnostic connector (OBD II) Power mirrors 166 PAGE: 166 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 167 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies Fuse/Relay Location 31 Fuse Amp Rating 20A 32 33 5A 5A 34 35 20A 15A Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description Front park lamps, Rear park lamps, License plate lamps, Dimmer switch, Trailer tow park lamps Brake switch (logic) Instrument cluster battery feed (B+) Power point Power locks CIMS #1273111 com_power-dist-title.mbs itdseq=215 Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads. art=raner500_b WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing fuses. WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs. If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and specifications chapter. 167 PAGE: 167 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 168 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies CIMS #708397 com_power-box-mbs.23l itdseq=216 2.3L engine (if equipped) art=raner512_b The high-current fuses are coded as follows: Fuse/Relay Location 1 Fuse Amp Rating 40A** 2 3 — 40A** 4 5 — 50A** 6 7 8 9 10 11 — 40A** — 40A** — 30A** Power Distribution Box Description Passenger compartment fuse panel Not used Passenger compartment fuse panel Not used Passenger compartment fuse panel Not used Starter solenoid Not used Ignition switch Not used Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine sensors 168 PAGE: 168 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 169 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies Fuse/Relay Location 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Fuse Amp Rating — 30A** — — — 40A** — 20A** — 10A* — 20A* — 10A* — — — — — — — 30A* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 — — — — 7.5A* — — 15A* Power Distribution Box Description Not used Blower motor (climate control) Not used Not used Not used ABS (motor) Not used Engine fan Not used PCM keep alive power Not used Fuel pump Not used A/C clutch solenoid Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (solenoids) Not used Not used Not used Not used Trailer tow (right turn) Not used Not used HEGOs 169 PAGE: 169 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 170 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Location Rating 42 7.5A* 43 — 44 — 45A — 45B — 46A — 46B — 47 — 48 — 49 — 50 — 51 — 52 — 53 — 54 — 55 — 56A — 56B — * Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses Power Distribution Box Description Trailer tow (left turn) Not used Not used Wiper HI/LO relay Wiper Park/Run relay Fuel pump relay Washer pump relay Engine fan relay Starter relay Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used PCM relay Blower relay A/C clutch solenoid relay Not used 170 PAGE: 170 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 171 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies CIMS #683869 com_power-box-mbs itdseq=217 3.0L and 4.0L engines (if equipped) art=raner514_d The high-current fuses are coded as follows: Fuse/Relay Location 1 Fuse Amp Rating 40A** 2 3 — 40A** 4 5 — 50A** 6 7 8 9 10 11 — 40A** — 40A** — 30A** Power Distribution Box Description Passenger compartment fuse panel Not used Passenger compartment fuse panel Not used Passenger compartment fuse panel Not used Starter solenoid Not used Ignition switch Not used Powertrain Control Module (PCM) relay fuse 171 PAGE: 171 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 172 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies Fuse/Relay Location 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Fuse Amp Rating — 30A** — — — 40A** — — — 10A* — 20A* — 10A* — 20A* — — — 15A* — 30A* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 — — — — 7.5A* — — 15A* Power Distribution Box Description Not used Blower motor (climate control) Not used Not used Not used ABS (motor) Not used Not used Not used PCM keep alive power Not used Fuel pump Not used A/C clutch solenoid Not used 4x4 module Not used Not used Not used Foglamps Not used Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (solenoids) Not used Not used Not used Not used Trailer tow (right turn) Not used Not used HEGOs 172 PAGE: 172 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 173 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Location Rating 42 7.5A* 43 — 44 — 45A — 45B — 46A — 46B — 47 — 48A — 48B — 51 — 52 — 53 — 54 — 55 — 56 — * Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses Power Distribution Box Description Trailer tow (left turn) Not used Not used Wiper HI/LO relay Wiper Park/Run relay A/C clutch solenoid Washer pump relay PCM relay Fuel pump relay Fog lamp relay Not used Not used Not used Not used Blower relay Starter relay CIMS #53242 com_change_tires.01 itdseq=218 CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving: • do not brake heavily. • gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed. • hold the steering wheel firmly. • slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. WARNING: The use of tire sealants is not recommended and may damage your tires. Temporary Emergency Spare Tire Information Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary emergency spare tire. This tire may be a T-type/mini-spare tire which will have the words “Temporary Use Only” molded into the tire sidewall or it may be a full size dissimilar spare tire/wheel that is different in brand, size or CIMS #754992 com_sparetire-info.ran itdseq=219 173 PAGE: 173 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 174 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies appearance from the road tire, which will be identified with a “Caution” label on the wheel. Both of these spare tires are considered “temporary”. Replace these temporary emergency spare tires on the vehicle with a tire of the same size, speed rating and load carrying capacity as the other road tires as soon as possible. It is not recommended that the vehicle be operated in 4WD modes with a temporary emergency spare tire. If 4WD operation is necessary, do not operate above speeds of 10 mph (16 km/h) or for distances above 50 miles (80 km). When driving with the temporary emergency spare tire do not: • Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) • Exceed 2000 miles (3200 km) • Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label • Tow a trailer • Use snow chains • Use more than one temporary emergency spare tire • Use commercial car washing equipment • Try to repair the temporary emergency spare tire Use of a temporary emergency spare tire at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following: • Handling, stability and braking performance • Comfort and noise • Ground clearance and parking at curbs • Winter weather driving capability • Wet weather driving capability Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information (if equipped) CIMS #1348491 com_dissimilar-tires itdseq=220 WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death. Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as 174 PAGE: 174 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 175 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Mazda. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather than repaired. When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not: • Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h) • Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time • Use commercial car washing equipment • Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel The T-type/mini-spare tire/wheel is a unique dissimilar spare tire/wheel that is narrower in width than the road tire/wheel and the tire size molded on the sidewall begins with the letter “T”. T-type/mini-spare tires/wheels have additional restrictions on use. See T-type/mini-spare tire information earlier in this section for more information. The usage of a dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to impairment of the following: • Handling, stability and braking performance • Comfort and noise • Ground clearance and parking at curbs • Winter weather driving capability • Wet weather driving capability • All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable) • Load leveling adjustment (if applicable) When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional caution should be given to: • Towing a trailer • Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body • Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a dissimilar spare tire/wheel and seek service as soon as possible. CIMS #1125281 com_spare-tire.mbs itdseq=221 Location of the spare tire and tools The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following locations: 175 PAGE: 175 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 176 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies Tool Spare tire Jack, jack handle, wheel nut wrench Key, spare tire lock (if equipped) Location Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear bumper Regular Cab: behind seats and underneath the jack and tools cover Cab Plus: stowed in the passenger side rear cab under the plastic tray inside the storage bin or behind the jump seat in a separate tool bag Cab Plus 4–Door: stowed behind the front seats, between jump seats and underneath jack and tools cover. In the glove box Removing the spare tire 1. Assemble the jack handle to the lug wrench as shown in the illustrations. When connecting the jack handle, assemble the following: • one handle extension and one typical extension. To assemble, slide parts together. To disconnect, depress button and pull apart. • one wheel nut wrench. Depress button and slide together. art=raner301_a art=raner302_a 176 PAGE: 176 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 177 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies 2. If equipped, unlock and remove the spare tire carrier lock from the rear access hole located just above the rear bumper and below the tailgate. art=raner303_a 3. Insert the straight end of the jack handle into the rear access hole located just above the rear bumper and below the tailgate. Forward motion will stop and resistance to turning will be felt when properly engaged. 4. Turn the handle counterclockwise until tire is lowered to the ground and the cable is slightly slack. art=unoer300_a 5. Remove the retainer from the spare tire. Stowing the spare tire 1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up. 2. Install the retainer through the wheel center and slide the wheel under the vehicle. 3. Turn the spare handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its original position underneath the vehicle. The spare handle ratchets when the tire is raised to the stowed position. It will not allow you to overtighten. art=unoer303_a 177 PAGE: 177 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 178 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies 4. If your vehicle is equipped with P265/75 R15 AT tires, do not stow a flat or inflated full size spare tire in the spare tire carrier. The flat full size tire should be stowed and tied down in the pickup box bed until it can be repaired. 5. If removed, install the spare tire carrier lock on the access hole above the bumper. Tire change procedure CIMS #684806 com_change_proc.mbs itdseq=222 WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or R (Reverse) (manual transmission). WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed. WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured. 1. Park on a level surface, activate hazard flashers and place gearshift lever in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission). 2. Set the parking brake and turn engine OFF. art=unogf300_b 178 PAGE: 178 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 179 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies 3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel. art=naver301_b 4. Insert tapered end of the lug wrench behind hub caps and twist them off. 5. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground. 6. Position the jack according to the following guides and turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is a maximum of 1 inch (25 mm) off the ground. art=viler304_a WARNING: To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only meant for changing the tire. • Front art=raner520_a 179 PAGE: 179 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 180 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies • Rear art=raner521_a Never use the differential as a jacking point. It is too easy for the vehicle to tilt or fall and you can be injured. 7. Remove the wheel lug nuts with the lug wrench. 8. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered. 9. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 10. Remove the jack and fully 1 tighten the lug nuts, in the order shown. Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications 3 4 later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification. 11. Stow the flat tire. Refer to 5 2 Stowing the spare tire. 12. Stow the jack and lug wrench. Make sure the jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you drive. 13. Unblock the wheels. Stowing the flat/spare tire Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in failure of cable or loss of spare tire. art=mbser300_a art=viler305_a CIMS #1112962 com_stow-tire.ran itdseq=223 180 PAGE: 180 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 181 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies 1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up. 2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the wire and retainer through the center of the wheel. 3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its original position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle increases significantly as the tire contacts the frame. The spare tire carrier will ratchet when the tire is in the fully stowed position. The spare tire carrier has a built-in ratchet feature that will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier ratchets with very little effort, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience. 4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame assembly. Push against the tire to make sure it is tightly seated under the vehicle. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the spare tire. 5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire pressure (every six months, per Service Maintenance Section), or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other components. 6. Install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the access hole above the rear bumper with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle. CIMS #1244586 com_lug-nut-torque.p150 itdseq=224 WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 50–100 miles (80–160 km) after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.). Lug nut socket Wheel lug nut torque* size/Bolt size lb.ft. N•m 100 135 Lug nut socket size: 3⁄4” (19 mm) hex Bolt size: 1⁄2 x 20 * Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Mazda recommended replacement fasteners. 181 PAGE: 181 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 182 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control. Note: If there is corrosion on the area where the wheel contacts the hub, apply a thin film of grease or anti-seize compound on that area. OVERHEATING If the temperature gauge indicates overheating and you experience power loss, you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine is probably too hot. If this happens: 1. Drive safely to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way. 2. Shift the automatic transmission into P (Park) or the manual transmission into the neutral position, and apply the parking brake. 3. Turn off the air conditioner. CIMS #1137423 com_overheating-mazdas itdseq=225 WARNING: Steam from an overheated engine is dangerous. The escaping steam could seriously burn you. Open the hood ONLY after steam is no longer escaping from the engine. 4. Check whether coolant or steam is escaping from under the hood or from the engine compartment. • If steam is coming from the engine compartment: do not go near the front of the vehicle. Stop the engine, then turn the ignition switch to the ON position without starting the engine. The radiator cooling fans will start to cool the engine. • If neither coolant nor steam is escaping: open the hood and idle the engine until it cools. If this does not lower the temperature, stop the engine and let it cool. 5. Check the coolant level. If it is low, look for leaks in the radiator hoses and connections, heater hoses and connections, radiator and water pump. 182 PAGE: 182 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 183 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies If you find a leak or other damage, or if coolant is still leaking, stop the engine and call an authorized dealer. See Adding coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications section. If you find no problems, the engine is cool and no leaks are obvious, carefully add coolant as required. WARNING: When the engine and radiator are hot, scalding coolant and steam may shoot out under pressure and cause serious injury. Do not remove the cooling system cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Note: If the engine continues to overheat or frequently overheats, have the cooling system inspected. The engine could be seriously damaged unless repairs are made. CIMS #52573 com_jump-start itdseq=226 JUMP STARTING WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage. WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if contacted. Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability; doing so may damage the catalytic converter. Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation. 1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle. 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle’s electrical system. 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts. CIMS #57613 com_prep-for-jump itdseq=227 183 PAGE: 183 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 184 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies 4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level. 5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical surges. Turn all other accessories off. CIMS #1269598 com_connecting-cables.mbs itdseq=228 Connecting the jumper cables art=coner703_a + + – – 1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery. art=coner702_a + + – – 2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the assisting battery. 184 PAGE: 184 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 185 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies art=coner701_a + + – – 3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the assisting battery. art=coner700_a + + – – 4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as grounding points. WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery. 5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts. CIMS #52575 com_jump_starts itdseq=229 Jump starting 1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed. 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 185 PAGE: 185 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 186 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies 3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables. CIMS #52576 com_removing-cables itdseq=230 Removing the jumper cables art=coner700_a + + – – Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected. 1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface. Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery. art=coner701_a + + – – 2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the booster vehicle’s battery. 186 PAGE: 186 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 187 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies art=coner702_a + + – – 3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle’s battery. art=coner703_a + + – – 4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the disabled vehicle’s battery. After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions. 187 PAGE: 187 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 188 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING CIMS #1218646 com_tow.no-sling-mbs itdseq=231 art=winer104_a If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your roadside assistance service provider. It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Mazda has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground. On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground. If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle damage may occur. 188 PAGE: 188 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 189 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Customer Assistance CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (U.S.A. MAINLAND AND HAWAII) Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition. If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Authorized Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the following steps: STEP 1: Contact Your Authorized Mazda Dealer Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the authorized dealer or the OWNER. STEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your authorized dealer management, you can reach Mazda North American Operations by one of the following ways: Log on at: www.mazdaUSA.com. Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Authorized Mazda Dealership in the U.S., can be found here. By email at: www.mazdaUSA.com (Click on CONTACT US at the bottom of the home page). By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500 By letter at: Attn: Customer Assistance Mazda North American Operations 7755 Irvine Center Drive Irvine, CA 92618–2922 P.O. Box 19734 Irvine, CA 92623–9734 Whatever way you contact us, please help us to serve you more efficiently and effectively by providing the following information: 1. Your name, address, and telephone number 2. Year and model of vehicle 3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash) CIMS #921592 com_assist-usa itdseq=232 189 PAGE: 189 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 190 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Customer Assistance 4. Purchase date and current mileage 5. Your authorized dealer’s name and location 6. Your question(s) If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda Distributor. CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (CANADA) Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition. In our experience, any questions, problems or complaints regarding the operation of your Mazda or any other general service transactions are most effectively resolved by your authorized dealer. If the cause of your dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal authorized dealer procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps: STEP 1: Contact Your Authorized Mazda Dealer Discuss the matter with a member of authorized dealer management. If the Service Manager has already reviewed your concerns, contact the owner of the authorized dealer or its General Manager. STEP 2: Call the Mazda Regional Office If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the authorized dealer Service Manager to arrange for you to meet the local Mazda Service Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda Canada Inc. Regional Office nearest you for such arrangements. STEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department If still not substantially satisfied, contact the Customer Relations Department, Mazda Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800) 263–4680. Provide the Department with the following information: 1. Your name, address, and telephone number 2. Year and model of vehicle 3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Refer to Vehicle identification label in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter of this manual for the location of the VIN. 4. Purchase date. 5. Present odometer reading. CIMS # com_assist-canada itdseq=233 190 PAGE: 190 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 191 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Customer Assistance 6. Your authorized dealer’s name and location 7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction. The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service Representative, will review the case to determine if everything possible has been done to ensure your satisfaction. Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases requires the use of your authorized dealer’s service facilities, personnel and equipment. We urge you to follow the above three steps in sequence therefore for most effective results. Mediation/Arbitration Program Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda’s Customer Satisfaction Program. If after exhausting procedures in this manual, your concern is still not resolved, you have another option. Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will advise you about how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an independent third party through binding arbitration. Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our authorized dealers. Mazda’s participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable contribution to our achieving that goal. There is no charge for using CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the award is binding on both you and Mazda Canada Inc. CIMS #1493251 com_mediation-arbit-mazda itdseq=234 Mediation/Arbitration Program Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda’s Customer Satisfaction Program. If after exhausting procedures in this manual, your concern is still not resolved, you have another option. Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will advise you about how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an independent third party through binding arbitration. Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our authorized dealers. Mazda’s participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable contribution to our achieving that goal. There is no charge for using CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the award is binding on both you and Mazda Canada Inc. CIMS #921594 com_camvap-mazda itdseq=235 Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an owner, Mazda, and/or one of it’s authorized dealers (that all 191 PAGE: 191 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 192 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Customer Assistance parties cannot agree upon), the owner may wish to use the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling and preparing for their arbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed with CAMVAP you must follow your Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously. CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories. Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the Program can obtain an information booklet from their authorized dealer, the Provincial Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Office At: 235 Yorkland Boulevard, Suite 300 North York, Ontario M2J 4Y8 http://camvap.ca Regional Offices Regional Offices Mazda Canada Inc. Western Region 8171 Ackroyd Road Suite 2000 Richmond, B.C. V6X 3K1 (604) 303–5670 Mazda Canada Inc. Central Region 305 Milner Avenue Suite 400 Scarborough, Ontario. M1B 3V4 1 (800) 263–4680 Areas Covered Alberta, British Columbia, Manitoba, Saskatchewan, Yukon Ontario 192 PAGE: 192 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 193 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Customer Assistance Regional Offices Mazda Canada Inc. Quebec Region/Atlantic Region 6111 Route Trans Canadienne Pointe Claire, Quebec H9R 5A5 (514) 694–6390 Areas Covered Quebec, New Brunswick, Nova Scotia, Prince Edward Island, Newfoundland CIMS #1493253 com_camvap-mazda2 itdseq=236 Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealerships. If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an owner, Mazda, and/or one of it’s authorized dealers (that all parties cannot agree upon), the owner may wish to use the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling and preparing for their arbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed with CAMVAP you must follow your Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously. CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories. Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the Program can obtain an information booklet from their authorized dealer, the Provincial Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Office At: 235 Yorkland Boulevard, Suite 407 North York, Ontario M2J 4Y8 http://camvap.ca 193 PAGE: 193 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 194 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Customer Assistance CIMS #1493252 com_reg-office-mazda itdseq=237 Regional Offices Regional Offices Mazda Canada Inc. Western Region 8171 Ackroyd Road Suite 2000 Richmond, B.C. V6X 3K1 (604) 303–5670 Mazda Canada Inc. Central Region 55 Vogell Road Richmond Hill, Ontario. L4B 3K5 1 (800) 263–4680 Mazda Canada Inc. Quebec Region/Atlantic Region 6111 Route Trans Canadienne Pointe Claire, Quebec H9R 5A5 (514) 694–6390 Areas Covered Alberta, British Columbia, Manitoba, Saskatchewan, Yukon Ontario Quebec, New Brunswick, Nova Scotia, Prince Edward Island, Newfoundland CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (PUERTO RICO) Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition. If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Authorized Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the following steps: STEP 1 Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the authorized dealer or the OWNER. CIMS #605763 com_assist-puertorico itdseq=238 194 PAGE: 194 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 195 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Customer Assistance STEP 2 If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please contact your area’s Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page). Please help us by providing the following information: 1. Your name, address, and telephone number 2. Year and model of vehicle 3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash) 4. Purchase date and current mileage 5. Your authorized dealer’s name and location 6. Your question(s) If you would like to write a letter, please address it to the following, Attn: Customer Assistance Plaza Motors Corp. Mazda de Puerto Rico P.O. Box 362722 San Juan, Puerto Rico 00936–2722 Tel: (787) 788–9300 This way, we can be sure to respond to you as efficiently as possible. That is our goal. If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda Distributor. IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY) California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle. California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs first: CIMS #1066951 com_lemon-law.mazda itdseq=239 195 PAGE: 195 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 196 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Customer Assistance 1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR 3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time). In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address: Mazda North American Operations 7755, Irvine Center Drive Irvine, CA 92618–2922 MAZDA IMPORTERS/DISTRIBUTORS U.S.A (Importer/Distributor) Mazda North American Operations 7755 Irvine Center Drive Irvine, CA 92618–2922 P.O. Box 19734 Irvine, CA 92623–9734 TEL: 1 (800) 222–5500 (in U.S.A.) (949) 727–1990 (outside U.S.A.) (Distributor in each area) CIMS #605764 com_distributors itdseq=240 CANADA Mazda Canada, Inc. 55 Vogell Road Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800) 263–4680 (in Canada) (416) 609–9909 (outside Canada) PUERTO RICO Plaza Motors Corp. (Mazda de Puerto Rico) P.O. Box 362722, San Juan, Puerto Rico 00936–2722 TEL: (787) 788–9300 GUAM (d.b.a. Triple J. Enterprises, Inc.) P.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam TEL: (671) 646–9216 196 PAGE: 196 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 197 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Customer Assistance SAIPAN Pacific International Marianas, Inc. (d.b.a. Midway Motors) P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950 TEL: (670) 234–7524 Triple J Saipan, Inc. (d.b.a. Triple J Motors) Beach Road Chalan LauLau Saipan, MP 96950 TEL: (670) 235–4868 AMERICAN SAMOA Polynesia Motors, Inc. P.O. Box 1120, Pago Pago, American Samoa 96799 TEL: (684) 699–1854 WARRANTIES FOR YOUR MAZDA • New Vehicle Limited Warranty • Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty • Anti-perforation Limited Warranty • Federal Emission Control Warranty – Emission Defect Warranty – Emission Performance Warranty • California Emission Control Warranty (if applicable) • Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty • Tire Warranty NOTE: Detailed warranty information is provided with your Mazda portfolio. CIMS #1493254 com_warranties-mazda2 itdseq=241 Outside the United States Government regulations in the United States require that automobiles meet specific emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for use in the United States, may differ from those sold in other countries. The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your Mazda outside the United States. CIMS #1493255 com_outside-us-mazda itdseq=242 197 PAGE: 197 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 198 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Customer Assistance However, in the event that you are moving to Canada permanently, Mazda vehicles built for use in the United States could be eligible for exportation to Canada with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety requirements. Special Note: The above is applicable for permanent import/export situations and not related to travelers on vacation. You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of the United States: • Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine. • Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be available. Please refer to your manufacturers warranty booklet for more information. Outside Canada Government regulations in Canada require that automobiles meet specific emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for use in Canada, may differ from those sold in other countries. The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your Mazda outside Canada. However, in the event that you are moving to the United States permanently, Mazda vehicles built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the United States with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety requirements. Special Note: The above is applicable for permanent import/export situations and not related to travelers on vacation. You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of Canada: • Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine. • Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be available. Please refer to your manufacturers warranty booklet for more information. CIMS #1493256 com_outside-can-mazda itdseq=243 198 PAGE: 198 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 199 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Customer Assistance CIMS #606351 com_non-genuine-accessories itdseq=244 ADD-ON NON-GENUINE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in stores. These may fit your vehicle, but they are not approved by the manufacturer for use with Mazda vehicles. When you install non-genuine parts or accessories, they could affect your vehicle’s performance or safety system; the manufacturer’s warranty doesn’t cover this. Before you install any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer. WARNING: Installation of Non-Genuine Parts or Accessories: Installation of non-genuine parts or accessories could be dangerous. Improperly designed parts or accessories could seriously affect your vehicle’s performance or safety system. This could cause you to have an accident or increase your chances of injuries in an accident. Always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine parts or accessories. WARNING: Add-On Electrical and Electronic Equipment: Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or choosing an improper installer could be dangerous. Essential systems could be damaged, causing engine stalling, air-bag (SRS) activation, ABS inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle. Be very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical equipment, such as mobile telephones, two-way radios, stereo systems, and car alarm systems. Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories. CIMS #689691 com_service-pubs.mbs itdseq=245 SERVICE PUBLICATIONS Factory-authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners who wish to do some of their own maintenance and repair. When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to the chart below. If they don’t have what you need in stock, they can order it for you. 199 PAGE: 199 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 200 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Customer Assistance PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION 9999 95 022B 05 WORKSHOP MANUAL 9999 95 020G 05 WIRING DIAGRAM 9999 95 023C 05 OWNER’S MANUAL WORKSHOP MANUAL: Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive train, body and chassis. WIRING DIAGRAM: Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the entire electrical system. OWNER’S MANUAL: This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and operation of your vehicle. This is not a technician’s manual. Please note that your Authorized Mazda Dealership has trained personnel and special service tools to correctly and safely maintain Mazda vehicles. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying your Mazda importer/distributor. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, or your Mazda importer/distributor). To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA 400 Seventh Street U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. (Note) If you live in the U.S.A., all correspondence to: CIMS #606352 com_report-safe-defects itdseq=246 200 PAGE: 200 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 201 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Customer Assistance Mazda North American Operations 7755, Irvine Center Drive Irvine, California 92618–2922 P.O. Box 19734 Irvine, CA 92623–9734 Customer Assistance Center or toll free at 1 (800) 222–5500 If you live outside of the U.S.A., please contact the nearest Mazda Distributor. See the Mazda importers/distributors section in this chapter. 201 PAGE: 201 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 202 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo, such as an approved shampoo available from your Mazda authorized dealer. • Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces. • Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to strong, direct sunlight. • Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results. • Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting. • It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle. • Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s paintwork and trim over time. • Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a car wash. • Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash off as soon as possible. CIMS #1091385 com_ext-wash.mazda itdseq=247 WAXING Applying Mazda Paint Sealant (ZC-45) to your vehicle every six months will assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage. • Wash the vehicle first. • Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Mazda Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer, or an equivalent quality product. • Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body (low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time. CIMS #975905 com_exterior-wax-fly itdseq=248 PAINT CHIPS Your dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color. Touch-up paint can be used to repair minor scratches to painted surfaces. CIMS #1001622 com_chip-repair.mazfly itdseq=249 202 PAGE: 202 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 203 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Cleaning • Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips. • Always read the instructions before using the products. CIMS #1001623 com_wheel-rim.mazfly itdseq=250 ALUMINUM WHEELS AND COVERS Aluminum wheel rims or covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish. In order to maintain their shine: • Clean with One Step Wash and Wax Concentrate, which is available from your authorized Mazda dealer. • Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers. • Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time. • Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent. • To remove tar and grease, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Removal, available from your authorized Mazda dealer. CIMS #1010871 com_engine-fly.mbs itdseq=251 ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing: • Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage. • Never spray the engine or other engine components with water. Water will damage the engine or other engine components. • Spray Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, available at your authorized Mazda dealer, on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. • Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine. 203 PAGE: 203 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 204 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Cleaning • 2.3L Engine art=ranmc723_e 2.3L 16 VALVE • 3.0L Engine art=ranmc704_b 204 PAGE: 204 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 205 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Cleaning • 4.0L Engine art=ranmc708_b • Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the running engine may cause internal damage. PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are available from your dealer. • For routine cleaning, use One Step Wash and Wax Concentrate, available at your authorized Mazda dealer. • If tar or grease spots are present, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Removal, available at your authorized Mazda dealer. CIMS #1001625 com_ext-plastic.mazfly itdseq=252 WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield, rear window and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wiper does not wipe properly, substances on the windshield, rear window or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow these tips: • The windshield or rear window may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, available from your authorized Mazda dealer. • Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches. • Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts. • Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly. CIMS #1001626 com_wiper.mazfly itdseq=253 205 PAGE: 205 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 206 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Cleaning INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry cloth, or use Mazda Dash & Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A). • Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection. CIMS #975923 com_inst-panel-fly itdseq=254 WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system. • Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces. INTERIOR TRIM • Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry cloth; you may also use Mazda Dash & Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A). • Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish. CIMS #975924 com_woodtone-fly itdseq=255 INTERIOR For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, and safety belts: • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. • Remove light stains and soil with Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner, available at your authorized Mazda dealer. • If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with Spot and Stain Remover, available at your authorized Mazda dealer. • If a solvent ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set. • Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials. CIMS #1129642 com_fabric.mazfly-no itdseq=256 UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt. CIMS # com_underbody-fly itdseq=257 206 PAGE: 206 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 207 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Cleaning MAZDA CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Mazda dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use these products or products of equivalent quality. These products are available at your authorized Mazda dealer. CIMS #1001629 com_care-prods.mazfly itdseq=258 207 PAGE: 207 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 208 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications INTRODUCTION Be extremely careful to prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your vehicle when using this manual for inspection and maintenance. If you’re unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you to have a reliable and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably an authorized Mazda Dealer. Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for your vehicle. Without this expertise and the parts that have been designed and made especially for your Mazda, inadequate, incomplete, and insufficient servicing may result in problems. This could lead to vehicle damage or an accident and injuries. For expert advice and quality service, consult an authorized Mazda Dealer. The owner should retain evidence that proper maintenance has been performed as prescribed. Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as opposed to defective materials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will not be honored. Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda’s original equipment may perform maintenance. But we recommend that it always be done by an authorized Mazda Dealer using genuine Mazda parts. CIMS #608142 com_maint-intro.j14 itdseq=259 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE Schedule 1 — Normal Driving Conditions/Emission Control Systems Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions apply. If any do apply, follow Schedule 2. • Repeated short-distance driving. • Driving in dusty conditions. • Towing a trailer. • Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic. • Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation. • High-speed operation with a fully loaded vehicle. • Off-road operation. NOTE: After the described period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended intervals. CIMS #684323 com_maintenance.mbs itdseq=260 208 PAGE: 208 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 209 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications CHART SYMBOLS I : Inspect and if necessary, correct, clean or replace A Adjust R : Replace L : Lubricate Normal driving service intervals — perform at the months or distances shown, whichever occurs first. Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km), whichever comes first) Maintenance Item Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 x 1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 (x 1000 km) ENGINE Engine oil Oil filter PCV valve AIR CLEANER Air cleaner filter IGNITION SYSTEM Spark plugs COOLING SYSTEM Engine Coolant (yellow) (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R *3 R R *4 Replace at first 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 60 months; after that, every 50,000 miles (80,000 km) or 36 months I I I I Coolant condition and protection, hoses and clamps — annually — prior to cold weather every 12 months CHASSIS AND BODY Wheel lug nut torque *1 I Inspect tires for wear and rotate (X I = recommended interval for optimal tire life) Clutch reservoir fluid level I Front wheel bearings (4x2) I X I I I I X I X I I I I X I I X I I I I X I X I I I L 209 PAGE: 209 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 210 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km), whichever comes first) Maintenance Item Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 x 1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 (x 1000 km) (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96) Disc brake system I I I I Caliper slide rails L L L L Drum brake system, lines and hoses I I I I Exhaust system for leaks, damage, I I looseness Manual transmission fluid R Automatic *2 I I transmission fluid Exhaust system shielding (for I I trapped material) L L L L L Propeller shaft U-joints (if equipped L with grease fittings) Parking brake system (for damage I I I I and operation) Ball joints (4x2) I/L I/L I/L I/L Transfer case fluid (4x4) Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) Rear axle lubricant Does not require replacement unless rear axle submerged in water Accessory drive belts Fuel filter *5 R R Steering linkage, ball joints, I I I I suspension and driveshaft *1 The wheel lug nuts must be retightened to the proper specifications at 500 miles (800 km) of new vehicle operation, at any wheel change, or at any other time the wheel lug nuts have been loosened. Refer to Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification. *2 Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) unless submerged in water. *3 At 60,000 miles (96,000 km), the dealer will replace the PCV valve at no cost, except Canada and California vehicles. *4 Refer to vehicle emission control information label for spark plug and gap specifications. 210 PAGE: 210 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 211 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications *5 The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty nor limit recall liability prior to completion of the vehicle’s useful life. Schedule 1 continued Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km), whichever comes first) Maintenance Item Months 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 x 1000 miles 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 80 84 88 92 96 (x 1000 km) (104)(112)(121)(128)(136)(144)(152)(160)(168)(176)(184) (192) ENGINE Engine oil Oil filter PCV valve AIR CLEANER Air cleaner filter IGNITION SYSTEM Spark plugs COOLING SYSTEM Engine Coolant (yellow) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R *3 R R *4 R Replace at first 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 60 months; after that, every 50,000 miles (80,000 km) or 36 months I I I I Coolant condition and protection, hoses and clamps — annually —prior to cold weather every 12 months CHASSIS AND BODY Wheel lug nut torque *1 I I Inspect tires for wear and rotate (X X X = recommended interval for optimal tire life) Clutch reservoir fluid level I Front wheel bearings (4x2) Disc brake system Caliper slide rails Drum brake system, lines and hoses I I I I L I I X I X I I I I X I I L I I X I I I I L I I X I X I I I L I L I 211 PAGE: 211 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 212 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km), whichever comes first) Maintenance Item Months 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 x 1000 miles 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 80 84 88 92 96 (x 1000 km) (104)(112)(121)(128)(136)(144)(152)(160)(168)(176)(184) (192) Exhaust system for leaks, damage, I I looseness Manual transmission fluid R Automatic *2 I I transmission fluid Exhaust system shielding (for I I trapped material) Propeller shaft U-joints (if equipped L L L L L L with grease fittings) I I I I Parking brake system (for damage and operation) Ball joints (4x2) I/L I/L I/L I/L Transfer case fluid (4x4) Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) Rear axle lubricant Does not require replacement unless rear axle submerged in water Accessory drive belts I Fuel filter *5 R R Steering linkage, ball joints, I I I I suspension and driveshaft *1 The wheel lug nuts must be retightened to the proper specifications at 500 miles (800 km) of new vehicle operation, at any wheel change, or at any other time the wheel lug nuts have been loosened. Refer to Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification. *2 Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) unless submerged in water. *3 At 60,000 miles (96,000 km), the dealer will replace the PCV valve at no cost, except Canada and California vehicles. *4 Refer to vehicle emission control information label for spark plug and gap specifications. *5 The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty nor limit recall liability prior to completion of the vehicle’s useful life. 212 PAGE: 212 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 213 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications SCHEDULE 2 — SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS If your driving habits FREQUENTLY include one or more of the following conditions: • Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) when outside temperatures remain below freezing. • Towing a trailer, or carrying maximum loads. • Operating in severe dust conditions. • Operating during hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic. • Extensive idling, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery service. • High speed operation with a fully loaded vehicle (max. GVW). • Off-road operation Change ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER every 3 months or 3,000 miles (4,800 km) whichever occurs first. NOTE: Idling the engine for extended periods will accumulate more hours of use on your vehicle than is actually indicated by the mileage odometer. Consequently, the odometer reading can be often misleading when determining the right time to change your engine oil and filter. If you are using your vehicle in a manner which allows it to remain stationary while the engine is running for long periods (door-to-door delivery, taxi, police, power/utility company trucks, or similar duty), then Mazda recommends you increase the frequency of oil and filter changes to an interval equivalent to 200 ENGINE HOURS or use. Since most vehicles are not equipped with hour-meters, it may be necessary for you to approximate your idle time and plan oil/filter changes accordingly. 213 PAGE: 213 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 214 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Suggested Maintenance Interval Towing a trailer or using a camper or car top carrier Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances as in heavy commercial use such as delivery, taxi or patrol car Operating in dusty conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads Off road operation Change Transfer Case Fluid (4x4) Lubricate Front Wheel Bearing (4x2) Inspect and Lubricate U-Joints Change Manual Transmission Fluid Replace Engine Air Filter Replace Spark Plugs Change Automatic Transmission Fluid Replace Fuel Filter Inspect Brake System Special Operating Conditions Replace Engine Oil and Filter Maintenance and Specifications 3,000 5,000 15,000 30,000 60,000 As As As 30,000 60,000 miles or miles miles miles miles required required required miles miles 3 months X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X For specific recommendations see your authorized Mazda dealer or qualified service professional. OWNER MAINTENANCE Owner Maintenance Schedule The owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle inspections at the indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable operation. Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or qualified service technician as soon as possible. While operating your vehicle 214 PAGE: 214 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 215 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications • Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell or exhaust fumes in the vehicle. • Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in the straight ahead position. • Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or “pulls” to one side when traveling on a smooth, level road. • When stopping, listen and check for strange sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or “hard to push” brake pedal. • If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transmission occur, check the transmission fluid level. • Check automatic transmission Park function. • Check parking brake. At least monthly • Check function of all interior and exterior lights. • Check tires for wear and proper air pressure. • Check engine oil level. • Check coolant level in the coolant reservoir. • Check washer fluid level. At least twice a year (for example, every spring and fall) • Check power steering fluid level. • Check clutch fluid level (if equipped). • Check and clean body and door drain holes. • Check and lubricate all hinges, latches, and outside locks. • Check and lubricate door rubber weather strips. • Check parking brake for proper operation. • Check lap/shoulder belts and seat latches for wear and function. • Check air pressure in spare tire. • Check windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid. • Check safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, air bag, safety belt) for operation. • Check cooling system fluid level and verify coolant specific gravity is correct for summer or winter conditions. 215 PAGE: 215 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 216 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications • Check battery water level (non-maintenance free). • Check battery connections and clean if necessary. Retightening lug nuts • Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km) after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.). • Refer to Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification. SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle: • We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy location. • We provide service maintenance section which makes tracking routine service easy. If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can provide necessary parts and service. Check your “Warranty Information” to find out which parts and services are covered. Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. Genuine Mazda parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle. CIMS #604851 com_ser_rec.j14 itdseq=261 PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE • Do not work on a hot engine. • Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts. • Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. • Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and all fuel related parts. CIMS #83506 com_precautions_servicing.04 itdseq=262 Working with the engine off • Automatic transmission: 1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park). 2. Turn off the engine and remove the key. 3. Block the wheels. • Manual transmission: CIMS #83508 com_working_off.05 itdseq=263 216 PAGE: 216 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 217 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications 1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1 (First). 2. Turn off the engine and remove the key. 3. Block the wheels. CIMS #83511 com_working_on.05 itdseq=264 Working with the engine on • Automatic transmission: 1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park). 2. Block the wheels. • Manual transmission: 1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in N (Neutral). 2. Block the wheels. Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. CIMS #555081 com_hood-title itdseq=265 OPENING THE HOOD CIMS #80404 com_hood_open.03 itdseq=266 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle located under the bottom of the instrument panel near the steering column. 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is located under the front center of the hood. 3. Lift the hood and support it with the prop rod. art=unogf302_a 217 PAGE: 217 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 218 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT CIMS #71972 com_engine-comp itdseq=267 2.3L I4 engine CIMS #528617 com_2.3L-rwd itdseq=268 art=ranmc141_b 1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 2. Engine coolant reservoir 3. Engine oil dipstick 4. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission) 5. Engine oil filler cap 6. Brake fluid reservoir 7. Power distribution box 8. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission) 9. Battery 10. Power steering fluid reservoir 11. Air filter assembly 218 PAGE: 218 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 219 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications CIMS #689982 com_3.0L-rwd.mbs itdseq=269 3.0L V6 engine art=ranmc115_g 1. Engine coolant reservoir 2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 3. Engine oil filler cap 4. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission) 5. Engine oil dipstick 6. Brake fluid reservoir 7. Power distribution box 8. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission) 9. Battery 10. Power steering fluid reservoir 11. Air filter assembly 219 PAGE: 219 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 220 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications 4.0L SOHC V6 engine CIMS #713068 com_4.0L-sohc.mbs itdseq=270 art=expmc101_m 1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 2. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission) 3. Engine oil filler cap 4. Engine oil dipstick 5. Brake fluid reservoir 6. Power distribution box 7. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission) 8. Battery 9. Power steering fluid reservoir 10. Air filter assembly 11. Engine coolant reservoir 220 PAGE: 220 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 221 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications CIMS #232781 com_windshield_fluid itdseq=271 CIMS #918793 com_wash_fluid.mbs itdseq=272 WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. In very cold weather, do not fill the reservoir completely. art=ranmc301_b UID SHER FL WA ON LY RADIATOR COOLANT ONLY Only use a washer fluid that meets Mazda specification . Do not use any special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug wash. They may cause squeaking, chatter noise, streaking and smearing. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system. WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40° F (4.5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident. Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system components. WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and wiper blades using undiluted windshield wiper solution or a mild detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. To avoid damaging the blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or other solvents. CIMS #1123866 com_check_wipers.mbs itdseq=273 221 PAGE: 221 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 222 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications Check the wiper blades for wear at least twice a year or when they seem less effective. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades. Changing the wiper blades 1. Pull the wiper arm away from the vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle from the wiper arm. Push the lock pin manually to release the blade and pull the wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm. 2. Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard. Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance. Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter. To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element. ENGINE OIL Checking the engine oil Refer to the service maintenance section for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil. 1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. 2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. 3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission). 4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat. 5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick). CIMS #959871 com_chnge_blades.fly itdseq=274 art=dnomc009_a CIMS #52549 itdseq=275 com_oil CIMS #1127536 com_chk-oil.maztrk itdseq=276 222 PAGE: 222 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 223 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications • 2.3L I4 engine art=ranmc135_d MIN MAX • 3.0L V6 engine art=ranmc137_a 223 PAGE: 223 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 224 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications • 4.0L SOHC V6 engine art=ranmc139_c 6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it again. • If the oil level is between the two holes or between the MIN and MAX marks (depending on application), the oil level is acceptable, DO NOT ADD OIL. • If the oil level is below the lower hole or the MIN mark, add enough oil to raise the level between the two holes or between the MIN-MAX range. • 2.3L I4 engine SAE 5W-20 art=ranmc136_b 224 PAGE: 224 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 225 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications • 3.0L V6 engine SAE 5W-20 art=ranmc122_b • 4.0L SOHC V6 engine SAE 5W-30 art=207mc008_c • Oil levels above the MAX mark or upper hole may cause engine damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer. 7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated. 225 PAGE: 225 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 226 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications Adding engine oil 1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter. 2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening. 3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is within the normal range on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick). 4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated. 5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap 1/4 turn until it stops. To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed. CIMS #1286226 com_add-oil.qtr-turn itdseq=277 Engine Oil Recommendations 2.3L & 3.0L Engines Look for this certification trademark. CIMS #689983 com_oil-rec.5w20.mbs itdseq=278 art=expii004_a SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended. Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers. Use an equivalent oil Mazda specification. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine. 226 PAGE: 226 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 227 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in the service maintenance section. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions, lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty. 4.0L Engine Look for this certification trademark. art=expii004_a SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended. Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers. Use an equivalent Mazda Specification. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions, lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty. Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in the service maintenance section. Engine Oil Filter Recommendation Change your engine oil filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in the service maintenance section. Mazda production and aftermarket (Mazda) oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Mazda Material and design specifications, start-up engine noises or knock may be experienced. 227 PAGE: 227 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 228 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications It is recommended you use the appropriate Mazda oil filter (or another brand meeting Mazda specifications) for your engine. BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Mazda maintenance-free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service. CIMS #918794 com_battery.mbs itdseq=279 art=ranmc105_b However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the battery electrolyte level. Refer to the Service Maintenance Section for the service interval schedules. Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”. Do not overfill the battery cells. If possible, try to only fill the battery cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the charging system checked. If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals. If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water. Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability. 228 PAGE: 228 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 229 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper ventilation. WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners. WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance. To begin this process: 1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake. 2. Put the gearshift lever in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the engine. 3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process. • The vehicle may need to be driven to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy. CIMS #72063 com_relearn.03 itdseq=280 229 PAGE: 229 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 230 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications art=dewmc111_a RN LE TU AD RE • If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel. If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected. • Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner. Follow your local authorized standards for disposal. Call your local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries. RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT CIMS #510581 com_cool.title itdseq=281 Checking engine coolant Your engine’s cooling system has been factory-filled with a 50/50 mixture of distilled water and Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant, or an equivalent premium engine coolant that meets Mazda specification. A 50/50 mixture of distilled water and Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant provides: • maximum cooling system efficiency. • freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C). • boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). • protection against rust and other forms of corrosion. • an accurate temperature readout from the engine coolant gauge. The engine coolant must be maintained at the correct fluid level and concentration to work properly. If the engine coolant fluid CIMS #689984 com_check-add-cool.mbs itdseq=282 230 PAGE: 230 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 231 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications level and concentration is not maintained correctly, damage to the engine and cooling system may result. • 2.3L engine art=ranmc146_a 231 PAGE: 231 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 232 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications • 3.0L & 4.0L engines art=ranmc108_a When the engine is cold, check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir. • The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill level” or within the “cold fill range” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon application). • Confirm the color and type of engine coolant before adding, to avoid mixing incompatible products. • Refer to the service maintenance section for service interval schedules. • Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your vehicle in this chapter. If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval, the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter. WARNING: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location. 232 PAGE: 232 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 233 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications Adding engine coolant Use only Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant or a premium engine coolant that meets a Mazda specification. • DO NOT USE Extended Life Engine Coolant (orange in color). • DO NOT USE a DEX-COOLt engine coolant or an equivalent engine coolant. • DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. • DO NOT USE supplemental coolant additives in your vehicle. These additives may harm your engine’s cooling system. • DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Make sure the correct coolant is used. • DO NOT MIX recycled coolant and conventional coolant together in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants may harm your engine’s cooling system. • The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty of your vehicle’s engine cooling system. If you are unsure which type of coolant your vehicle requires, contact your local authorized dealer. CIMS #691521 com_adding-coolant.mbs itdseq=283 WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid reservoir. If engine coolant is sprayed onto the windshield, it could make it difficult to see through the windshield. When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the engine is cool , until the appropriate fill level is obtained. • NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%. • NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%. • Engine coolant concentrations above 60% or below 40% will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone (without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing. 233 PAGE: 233 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 234 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles, which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant. Note: The 3.0L and 4.0L V6 engines use the overflow system, and the 2.3L I4 engines use the degas system. WARNING: To avoid scalding hot steam or coolant from being released from the engine cooling system, never remove the reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. Failure to follow this warning may result in damage to the engine’s cooling system and possible severe personal injury. 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let it cool. 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn cap counterclockwise until pressure begins to release. 3. Step back while the pressure releases. 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap. 5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD” level on the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full. 6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss.) After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration, refer to Checking engine coolant . If the concentration is not 50/50 (protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50 coolant concentration. Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level. If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system. 234 PAGE: 234 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 235 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage. Recycled engine coolant Not all coolant recycling processes produce coolant which meets Mazda specification. Use of a recycled engine coolant which does not meet Mazda specifications may harm engine and cooling system components. CIMS #691523 com_recycled-coolant.mbs itdseq=284 Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids. Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer to Refill capacities in this section. Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this section. CIMS #52568 com_refill-capacity itdseq=285 Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34° F [–36° C ]): • It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%. • NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%. • Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. • Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months. If you drive in extremely hot climates: • It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40%. • NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%. • Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. CIMS #455269 com_extreme.climates itdseq=286 235 PAGE: 235 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 236 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications • Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. • Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive. Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection. FUEL FILTER For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to service maintenance section for the appropriate intervals for changing the fuel filter. Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Mazda part. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system if an authorized Mazda fuel filter is not used. CIMS #246409 com_fuel.filter itdseq=287 WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS CIMS #52343 itdseq=288 com_fueling Important safety precautions CIMS #1512892 com_fuel-prec.mbs itdseq=289 WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others. WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury. WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. 236 PAGE: 236 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 237 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications WARNING: Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent. Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel: • Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before fueling your vehicle. • Always turn off the vehicle before fueling. • Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours. • Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury. • Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury. • Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation. • Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction. art=f12mc032_a WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes. 237 PAGE: 237 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 238 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container. Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an ungrounded fuel container: • Place approved fuel container on the ground. • DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the cargo area/pickup bed). art=mbsmc001_a • Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling. • DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position. Fuel Filler Cap Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off feature. When fueling your vehicle: 1. Turn the engine off. 2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 of a turn to remove it. 3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe. 4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe. 5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it clicks at least once. “Check Fuel Cap” illuminates when the ignition is turned to the ON position to ensure your bulb is working. When this light turns on, check the fuel filler cap. Continuing to operate the vehicle with the Check Fuel Cap light on, can activate the Service Engine Soon warning. When the fuel filler cap is properly re-installed, the light(s) will turn off after a period of normal driving. It may take a long period of time for the system to detect an improperly installed fuel filler cap. If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for your vehicle. The warranty may be void CIMS #918851 com_fuel.cap.ckfuelcap.mbs itdseq=290 238 PAGE: 238 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 239 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Mazda fuel filler cap is not used. WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others. WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury. Choosing the right fuel Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to deteriorate more rapidly. In Canada, premium grade fuel generally contains more metallic additives than regular fuel. We recommend using regular grade fuel. In Canada, many fuels contain metallic additives, but fuels free of such additives may be available; check with your local fuel dealer. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components. Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was not designed may not be covered by your warranty. CIMS #52352 com_choosing-fuel itdseq=291 Cleaner air Mazda endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to improve air quality. CIMS #52358 itdseq=292 Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use “Regular” unleaded gasoline with pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. We do not recommend the use of (R+M)/2 METHOD gasolines labeled as “Regular” that are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas. CIMS #52354 com_octane-recommend.01 itdseq=293 87 com_clean-air art=f12mc033_b 239 PAGE: 239 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 240 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage. Fuel quality If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium” unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use “Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized dealer. It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty. Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle. Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter. CIMS #52356 com_fuel-quality itdseq=294 Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components. If you have run out of fuel: • You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. CIMS #459922 com_no-fuel.ce-iso itdseq=295 • The indicator may come on. For more information on the “Check Engine” indicator, refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter. ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fillups or fuel gauge readings are CIMS #212622 com_essentials-fuel.title itdseq=296 CIMS #713069 com_measuring-tecniks.mbs itdseq=297 240 PAGE: 240 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 241 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km). Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities section of this chapter. The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty. The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank. For consistent results when filling the fuel tank: • Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling, an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running. • Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time the tank is filled. • Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling. • Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating. • Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand. • Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the same direction each time you fill up. • Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time. Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent. CIMS #212766 com_filling-the-tank itdseq=298 Calculating fuel economy 1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading (in miles or kilometers). 2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in gallons or liters). 3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading. CIMS #212767 com_calculating-fuel-economy itdseq=299 241 PAGE: 241 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 242 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications 4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading. 5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy: Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used. Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total kilometers traveled. Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy. Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy. CIMS #212768 com_driving-style.title itdseq=300 Habits • Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel. • Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy. • Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste fuel. • Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop. • Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy. • Slow down gradually. • Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]). • Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy. • Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy. • You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between fourth and fifth gear occurs. Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy. • Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy. • Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy. CIMS #1280386 com_habits.maz itdseq=301 242 PAGE: 242 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 243 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications • Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving. Maintenance • Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size. • Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy. • Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. • Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in service maintenance section. CIMS #212770 com_drvg-style_maintenance itdseq=302 Conditions • Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed. • Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried). • Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may reduce fuel economy. • Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy. • Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving. • Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain. • Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal. • Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than two-wheel-drive operation. • Close windows for high speed driving. CIMS #212936 com_conditions itdseq=303 EPA window sticker Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles. It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km) CIMS #212938 com_epa-sticker itdseq=304 243 PAGE: 243 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 244 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM CIMS #1221316 com_emis-ses.maztrk itdseq=305 Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly: • Use only the specified fuel listed. • Avoid running out of fuel. • Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds. • Have the items listed in service maintenance section performed according to the specified schedule. The scheduled maintenance items listed in service maintenance section are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system. If other than Mazda authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control, such non-Mazda parts should be equivalent to genuine Mazda parts in performance and durability. WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. indicator, charging system warning light or the Illumination of the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly. WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent 244 PAGE: 244 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 245 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up specifications. Please consult your “Warranty Information” for complete emission warranty information. On board diagnostics (OBD-II) Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). This OBD-II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause your indicator to illuminate. Examples are: 1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly. 2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel. 3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler cap in this chapter. These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel and/or properly tightening the fuel cap. After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the indicator should turn off—A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving. No additional vehicle service is required. CIMS #1200842 com_onboard-OBDII itdseq=306 If the indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of the on-board diagnostics system. If your indicator is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and chimes section of the Instrument Cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test with the indicator on. CIMS #460104 com_ready-test.iso itdseq=307 If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced, the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test” 245 PAGE: 245 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 246 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as described below: • First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway. • Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with at least four idle periods. Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started, do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. POWER STEERING FLUID • 2.3L I4 engine CIMS #76037 com_check-steering-fluid.04 itdseq=308 art=ranmc143_a • 3.0L V6 engine art=expmc500_a 246 PAGE: 246 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 247 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications • 4.0L V6 engine art=expmc501_a DO N P ING OVER FILOL T OW FLUIDEER ER ST Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the service maintenance section for the service interval schedules. If adding fluid is necessary, use only MERCONt ATF. 1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C). 2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several times. 3. Turn the engine off. 4. If your vehicle is equipped with a 3.0L V6 engine, check the fluid level on the dipstick. It should be within the FULL HOT range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range. 5. If your vehicle is equipped with a 4.0L SOHC V6 or 2.3L I4 engine, check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range. 6. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking the level until it reaches the FULL HOT range. Be sure to put the dipstick back in the reservoir. 247 PAGE: 247 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 248 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications BRAKE FLUID The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear, and will rise when the brake components are replaced. Fluid levels below the “MAX” line MAX that do not trigger the brake system warning lamp are within the normal operating range, there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range, the performance of your brake system could be compromised, seek service from your authorized dealer immediately. CIMS #1127051 com_brake_title itdseq=309 CIMS #1265242 com_brake-max.maz itdseq=310 art=unomc300_a WARNING: Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. WARNING: If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will cause permanent damage to your brakes. WARNING: Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry. This may cause the brakes to fail. CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED) CIMS #918853 com_clutch.truck.mbs itdseq=311 Check the fluid level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the service interval schedules. During normal operation, the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should remain constant. If the fluid level drops, refill the fluid level to the step in the reservoir. Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Mazda specification. Refer to Lubricant Specifications in this chapter. 248 PAGE: 248 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 249 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications WARNING: Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. 1. Clean the reservoir cap before removal to prevent dirt and water from entering the reservoir. 2. Remove cap and rubber diaphragm from reservoir. 3. Add fluid until the level reaches the step in the reservoir. 4. Reinstall rubber diaphragm and cap onto reservoir. art=ranmc153_a TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid • Refer to service maintenance section for scheduled check and change intervals. • Transmission does not consume fluid. • Check fluid when transmission is not operating properly or if you see a leak. • Fluid level must be checked at normal operating temperature, 20 miles (30 km) of driving. To check and add fluid: 1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) to reach normal operating temperatures. 2. If driven in hot weather, city traffic, pulling a trailer, allow transmission to cool for 30 minutes before checking. 3. Engage parking brake, start engine. 4. Put your foot on the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever slowly through all of the gear ranges. 5. Shift to P (Park) and leave the engine running. 6. Remove the dipstick, wipe clean with a dry lint free rag. 7. Install and fully seat the dipstick into the filler tube. CIMS #80235 com_transmission-fluid itdseq=312 CIMS #953918 com_check_autotran.fly itdseq=313 249 PAGE: 249 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 250 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications 8. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. Level should be in the cross-hatched area. 9. If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250ml) increments through the filler tube until the level is correct at normal operating temperatures. Refer to the Lubricant specifications section in this chapter for the correct fluid type. The use of any other non-approved fluid may cause internal transmission damage. 10. Fluid can be checked at ambient temperatures between 50–95°F (10–30°C). DO NOT ADD fluid until the transmission is at normal operating temperatures or the transmission will be overfilled. Low fluid level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at or below the bottom of the dipstick. High fluid level Fluid levels above the safe range may cause overheating, shift and/or engagement concerns and internal transmission damage. If an overfill condition occurs, excess fluid should be removed by an authorized dealer. art=ranmc130_a art=ranmc131_a CIMS #953919 com_trans-level.fly itdseq=314 art=ranmc129_b art=ranmc132_a 250 PAGE: 250 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 251 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications CIMS #1126961 com_chk-man-trans.maz itdseq=315 Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped) 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. 2. Engage the parking brake fully – put in first gear. 3. Assure the vehicle cannot move. 4. Clean the filler plug. 5. Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level. art=mbsmc002_a 6. Fluid level should be at the bottom of the opening. 7. Add enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening. 8. Install and tighten the fill plug securely. art=f23mc115_a Use only fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. 251 PAGE: 251 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 252 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications TRANSFER CASE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED) 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. 2. Engage the parking brake fully – put in first gear. 3. Assure the vehicle cannot move. 4. Clean the filler plug. 5. Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level. 6. Fluid level should be at the bottom of the opening. 7. Add enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening. 8. Install and tighten the fill plug securely. CIMS #918861 com_check-add-tcase.mbs itdseq=316 art=ranmc128_b art=f12mc022_a Use only fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE CIMS #918862 com_serv-shaft-yoke.mbs itdseq=317 Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require lubrication. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be necessary. 252 PAGE: 252 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 253 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications CHECKING AND ADDING REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. 2. Engage the parking brake fully – put in first gear. 3. Assure the vehicle cannot move. 4. Clean the filler plug. 5. Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level. art=mbsmc003_a 6. Fluid level should be at the bottom of the opening. 7. Add enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening. 8. Install and tighten the fill plug securely. art=f12mc022_a Use only fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Refer to Lubricant Specifications in this chapter. CIMS #685182 com_refill.mbs itdseq=318 REFILL CAPACITIES Fluid Engine oil (includes filter change) Brake fluid Mazda Part Name Mazda SAE 5W20 Premium Motor Oil Application Capacity 2.3L engine Mazda SAE 5W30 Premium Motor Oil DOT 3 Brake Fluid 4.0L V6 engine 4.0 quarts (3.8L) 4.5 quarts (4.3L) 5.0 quarts (4.7L) 3.0L V6 engines All Fill to line on reservoir6 253 PAGE: 253 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 254 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications Fluid Mazda Part Name Mazda MERCONt ATF Mazda MERCONt ATF Mazda MERCONtV ATF Power steering fluid Transmission fluid 1 Engine coolant 4 Application Capacity All Fill to range on dipstick 2.8 quarts (2.65L) 2 9.9 quarts (9.4L) 3 5-speed manual 4x2 vehicles with automatic and 2.3L I4 engine 4x2 vehicles with automatic and 3.0L or 4.0L engines 4x4 vehicles with automatic and 3.0L or 4.0L Premium Engine 2.3 L I4 engine Coolant with manual transmission 2.3L I4 engine with automatic transmission 3.0L V6 engine with manual transmission 3.0L V6 engine with automatic transmission 4.0L V6 engine with manual transmission 4.0L V6 engine with automatic transmission 10.0 quarts (9.5L)3 10.3 quarts (9.8L) 3 10.5 quarts (10.0L) 10.2 quarts (9.7L) 15.1 quarts (14.3L) 14.8 quarts (14.0L) 13.7 quarts (13.0L) 13.2 quarts (12.5L) 254 PAGE: 254 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 255 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications Fluid Fuel tank Transfer Case Fluid Front axle lubricant Rear axle lubricant5 Windshield washer fluid Mazda Part Name N/A Mazda MERCONt ATF Mazda SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant Mazda SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate Application Capacity Regular cab (Short wheel base) SuperCab 17 gallons (64.4L) 4x4 Vehicles 4x4 Vehicles 19.5 gallons (73.8L) 1.25 quarts (1.2L) 3.6 pints (1.7L) All 5.0-5.3 pints (2.4-2.5L) All 2.75 quarts (2.6L) 1 Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick handle. MERCONt and MERCONt V are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCONt and MERCONtV. Refer to the service maintenance section to determine the correct service interval. 2 Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. 3 Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range. 4 Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant. DO NOT USE Mazda Extended Life Engine Coolant (orange in color). Refer to Adding engine coolant, in this chapter. 255 PAGE: 255 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 256 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications 5 Traction-Lok axles use 4.75–5.0 pints (2.2–2.4L) of rear axle lubricant. Add 4 oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier meeting Mazda specifications for complete refill of Traction-Lok axles. Service refill capacities are determined by filling the rear axle 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch (6 mm to 14 mm) below the bottom of the filler hole. 6 Brake fluid will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when brake components are replaced. Fluid levels below the MAX line that do not trigger the brake warning light are within the normal operating range, there is no need to add fluid. If the levels are outside the normal operating range, the performance of your brake system could be compromised, seek service from your local authorized dealer immediately. LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS Item Front axle (4X4) Rear axle Mazda part name or equivalent SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant1 High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid 4 Silicone Lubricant Mazda Premium Engine Coolant3 SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil CIMS #75473 com_lubes.all itdseq=319 CIMS #691524 com_lubes.mbs itdseq=320 Brake fluid and clutch fluid (if equipped) Door weather strips Engine coolant Engine oil 2.3L I4 and 3.0L V6 engines Engine oil 4.0L V6 engines SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil Hinges, door checks, latches, Multi-Purpose Grease striker plates, fuel filler door hinge and seat tracks Transmission /steering/parking Premium Long-Life Grease brake linkages and pivots, brake and clutch pedal shaft, clutch pilot bearing and input shaft spline (manual transmission) 256 PAGE: 256 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 257 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications Item Power steering fluid, transfer case fluid (4X4) and transmission fluid (manual) Automatic transmission (5R44E and 5R55E) Windshield washer fluid Mazda part name or equivalent MERCONt ATF MERCONtV ATF2 Ultra-clear Windshield Washer Concentrate 1 Add 4 oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier meeting Mazda specifications for complete refill of Traction-Lok axles. If submerged in water, the rear axle lubricant should be changed. 2 Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick handle. MERCONt and MERCONt V are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCONt and MERCONt V. Refer to your service maintenance section to determine the correct service interval. 3 Do not mix different types or colors of engine coolant. 4 Brake fluid will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when brake components are replaced. Fluid levels below the MAX line that do not trigger the brake warning light are within the normal operating range, there is no need to add fluid. If the levels are outside the normal operating range, the performance of your brake system could be compromised, seek service from your authorized dealer immediately. ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS Engine Cubic inches Required fuel Firing order Spark plug gap Ignition system Compression ratio 2.3L I4 engine 138 87 octane 1-3-4-2 0.049–0.053 inch (1.25–1.35mm) EDIS 9.7:1 3.0L V6 engine 182 87 octane 1-4-2-5-3-6 0.051–0.057 inch (1.29–1.45mm) EDIS 9.6:1 4.0L V6 engine 245 87 octane 1-4-2-5-3-6 0.052–0.056 inch (1.32–1.42mm) EDIS 9.7:1 CIMS #716286 com_data.mazda itdseq=321 CIMS #685183 com_data.mbs itdseq=322 257 PAGE: 257 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 258 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications CIMS #686817 com_vehicle_dimen.mbs itdseq=323 VEHICLE DIMENSIONS Vehicle dimensions (1) Overall length (2) Overall width (3) Overall height – 4x2/4x4 (4) Wheelbase (5) Track - Front (5) Track - Rear Regular Cab inches (mm) 188.5 (4788) 69.4 (1762) 65.0 (1652) / 68.5 (1740) 111.4 (2831) 58.5 (1486) 57.3 (1455) SuperCab inches (mm) 202.6 (5147) 70.3 (1785) 66.0 (1676) / 68.7 (1746) 125.7 (3192) 58.5 (1486) 57.3 (1455) art=ranmc705_a 3 5 2 258 PAGE: 258 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 259 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications art=ranmc706_a 4 1 art=ranmc707_a 4 1 IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Compliance Certification Label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be located. The Safety Compliance Certification Label is located on the structure by the trailing edge of the driver’s door or the edge of the driver’s door. CIMS #52653 com_vehicle-info.01 itdseq=324 CIMS #606356 com_vinplate.j14 itdseq=325 259 PAGE: 259 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 260 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications Vehicle identification number (VIN) The vehicle identification number is attached to a metal tag and is located on the driver side instrument panel. Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number. CIMS #72686 com_vin-numbers.02 itdseq=326 art=navmc710_a XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following information: 1. World manufacturer identifier 2. Brake type and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 3. Vehicle line, series, body type 4. Engine type 5. Check digit CIMS #734836 com_vin-info.all itdseq=327 art=204mc036_a 6. Model year 7. Assembly plant 8. Production sequence number 260 PAGE: 260 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 261 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Maintenance and Specifications CIMS #1466141 com_trans-code.all itdseq=328 TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS You can find a transmission/transaxle code on the Safety Compliance Certification Label . The following table tells you which transmission or transaxle each code represents. Code D R art=dnomc047_a CIMS #1498292 com_trans-code.mbs itdseq=329 Description Five-speed automatic (5R44E/5R55E) Five-speed manual (R1) 261 PAGE: 261 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 262 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Accessories CELL PHONES Use of cell phones and other devices by driver: CIMS #913856 com_cell_phone-mazda itdseq=330 WARNING: Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver’s hands. Use of these devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious accident. If a passenger is unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe area before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use a hands-free system to at least allow the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other electrical device while the vehicle is moving and, instead, concentrate on the full-time job of driving. In addition, the gasoline distributors are warning against using cell phones during refueling procedures, due to their increased concern about static electricity fires in the self-service pump environment. 262 PAGE: 262 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 263 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Index A ABS (see Brakes) .....................145 Airbag supplemental restraint system ..........................................77 and child safety seats ..............80 description ................................77 disposal ......................................83 driver airbag ..............................81 indicator light ...........................83 operation ...................................81 passenger airbag .......................81 passenger deactivation switch .84 Ambulance packages ....................7 Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) .....................................230 Anti-lock brake system (see Brakes) ..............................145–146 Audio system 6-CD in dash .............................24 Single CD ..................................21 Audio system (see Radio) ..19, 21, 24, 28 Automatic transmission ............149 driving an automatic overdrive .................................151 fluid, refill capacities ..............253 fluid, specification ..................257 Auxiliary power point .................48 Axle lubricant specifications ..256–257 refill capacities ........................253 traction lok ..............................148 B Battery .......................................228 acid, treating emergencies .....228 jumping a disabled battery ....183 maintenance-free ....................228 servicing ..................................228 Bed extender ..............................54 BeltMinder ...................................72 Brakes ........................................145 anti-lock ...........................145–146 anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light ...........................146 fluid, checking and adding ....248 fluid, refill capacities ..............253 fluid, specifications .........256–257 lubricant specifications ..256–257 parking ....................................147 shift interlock ..........................149 Break-in period .............................5 Bulbs ............................................40 C Capacities for refilling fluids ....253 Cassette tape player ...................24 Cell phone warning ...................262 Changing a tire .........................173 Child safety restraints ................90 child safety belts ......................90 Child safety seats ........................94 attaching with tether straps ....98 in front seat ..............................95 in rear seat ................................95 LATCH .....................................101 tether anchorage hardware .....98 Chimes (warning) .......................16 Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment ..............203 instrument panel ....................206 interior .....................................206 interior trim ............................206 Mazda car care products .......207 263 PAGE: 263 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 3 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 264 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Index plastic parts ............................205 washing ....................................202 waxing .....................................202 wheels ......................................203 wiper blades ............................205 Clock adjust AM/FM Stereo ...........................19 AM/FM stereo CD .....................21 AM/FM stereo tape/CD/MP3 ....24 Premium AM/FM stereo CD6/MP3 ...................................28 Single CD ..................................21 Clutch fluid ..........................................248 operation while driving ..........153 recommended shift speeds ....153 Console ........................................48 Coolant checking and adding ..............230 refill capacities ................235, 253 specifications ..................256–257 Cruise control (see Speed control) ........................................50 Customer Assistance .......189–190, 194 D Daytime running lamps (see Lamps) .........................................36 Dipstick engine oil .................................222 Doors lubricant specifications ..........256 Driveline universal joint and slip yoke ....................................252 Driving under special conditions ..................155, 158, 160 mud ..........................................159 sand .........................................159 snow and ice ...........................160 through water .................159, 161 E Emergencies, roadside jump-starting ..........................183 Emergency Flashers .................162 Emission control system ..........244 Engine ........................................258 cleaning ...................................203 coolant .....................................230 idle speed control ...................228 lubrication specifications 256–257 refill capacities ........................253 service points ..................218–220 starting after a collision .........162 Engine block heater .................145 Engine oil ..................................222 checking and adding ..............222 dipstick ....................................222 filter, specifications ................226 recommendations ...................226 refill capacities ........................253 specifications ..................256–257 Exhaust fumes ..........................144 F Fluid capacities .........................253 Foglamps .....................................37 Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......155 driving off road .......................157 electronic shift ........................156 indicator light .........................155 preparing to drive your vehicle .....................................148 Fuel ............................................236 264 PAGE: 264 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 3 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 265 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Index calculating fuel economy .......240 cap ...........................................238 capacity ...................................253 choosing the right fuel ...........239 comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates .................243 detergent in fuel .....................239 filling your vehicle with fuel .236, 238, 241 filter, specifications ................236 fuel pump shut-off switch .....162 improving fuel economy ........240 octane rating ...................239, 258 quality ......................................240 running out of fuel .................240 safety information relating to automotive fuels .....................236 Heating heating and air conditioning system .................................33–34 Hood ..........................................217 I Ignition ...............................141, 258 Infant seats (see Safety seats) ..94 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) testing ........................................245 Instrument panel cleaning ...................................206 cluster ........................................12 lighting up panel and interior .37 location of components ............12 J Fuel pump shut-off switch .......162 Fuses ..................................163–164 G Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............238 Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) ...................................240 Jack ............................................173 positioning ...............................173 storage .....................173, 175–177 Jump-starting your vehicle ......183 K Gauges .........................................16 Keys positions of the ignition .........141 H L Hazard flashers .........................162 Headlamps ...................................36 aiming ........................................37 bulb specifications ....................40 daytime running lights .............36 flash to pass ..............................36 high beam .................................36 replacing bulbs .........................41 turning on and off ....................36 Lamps bulb replacement specifications chart ..................40 daytime running light ...............36 fog lamps ...................................37 headlamps .................................36 headlamps, flash to pass ..........36 instrument panel, dimming .....37 interior lamps .....................40–41 replacing bulbs .......40–41, 43–46 265 PAGE: 265 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 3 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 266 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Index Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) .................................39 LATCH anchors .........................101 Lights, warning and indicator ....12 anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........146 Load limits .................................122 Loading instructions .................129 Lubricant specifications ...256–257 Lug nuts ....................................181 Lumbar support, seats ...............64 M Manual transmission .................153 fluid capacities ........................253 lubricant specifications ..........257 reverse .....................................154 Mirrors .........................................50 fold away ...................................50 side view mirrors (power) .......50 Motorcraft parts ........................236 O Octane rating ............................239 Oil (see Engine oil) ..................222 Overdrive .....................................53 Overheating ...............................182 P Parking brake ............................147 Power distribution box (see Fuses) ........................................167 Power door locks ........................56 Power mirrors .............................50 Power point .................................48 Power steering ..........................148 fluid, checking and adding ....246 fluid, refill capacity ................253 fluid, specifications .........256–257 Power Windows ...........................49 Preparing to drive your vehicle 148 R Radio ..........................19, 21, 24, 28 Single CD ..................................21 Relays ........................................163 Remote entry system .................57 illuminated entry ......................59 locking/unlocking doors .....56–57 S Safety Belt Maintenance ............76 Safety belts (see Safety restraints) ........................65, 67–70 Safety restraints ..............65, 67–70 belt minder ...............................72 extension assembly ..................71 for adults .............................67–69 for children .........................89–90 safety belt maintenance ...........76 warning light and chime ..........72 Safety restraints - LATCH anchors ......................................101 Safety restraints - tether anchors ........................................98 Safety seats for children ............94 Safety Compliance Certification Label ....................259 Seat belts (see Safety restraints) ....................................65 Seats ............................................63 266 PAGE: 266 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 3 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 267 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Index snow tires and chains ............121 child safety seats ......................94 spare tire .........................173–174 Servicing your vehicle ..............216 terminology .............................108 Setting the clock tire grades ...............................108 AM/FM stereo ...........................19 treadwear ........................107, 112 AM/FM stereo CD .....................21 AM/FM stereo tape/CD/MP3 ....24 Towing .......................................129 Premium AM/FM stereo recreational towing .................139 CD6/MP3 ...................................28 trailer towing ..........................129 Snowplowing .................................7 wrecker ....................................188 Spark plugs, specifications .......258 Traction-lok rear axle ...............148 Special notice Transfer case ambulance conversions ..............7 fluid checking .........................252 utility-type vehicles ....................6 Specification chart, lubricants 256–257 Transmission automatic operation ...............149 Speed control ..............................50 brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....149 fluid, checking and adding Starting your vehicle .......141–142, (manual) .................................251 144 fluid, refill capacities ..............253 jump starting ..........................183 lubricant specifications ..256–257 Steering wheel manual operation ....................153 tilting .........................................47 Turn signal ..................................39 Stereo Single CD ..................................21 V T Tether anchors ............................98 Tilt steering wheel ......................47 Tires ...........................107–108, 173 alignment ................................114 care ..........................................112 changing ..........................173, 178 checking the pressure ............110 inspecting and inflating .........109 label .........................................121 replacing ..................................116 rotating ....................................114 safety practices .......................113 sidewall information ...............117 Vehicle dimensions ...................258 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ..........................................260 Vehicle loading ..........................122 camper bodies ........................140 Ventilating your vehicle ...........145 W Warning chimes ...........................16 Warning lights (see Lights) .......12 Washer fluid ..............................221 Water, Driving through .............161 267 PAGE: 267 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 3 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus) JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 268 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005 /ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff Index Windows power .........................................49 Windshield washer fluid and wipers ..........................................47 checking and adding fluid .....221 checking and cleaning ............221 replacing wiper blades ...........222 Wrecker towing .........................188 268 PAGE: 268 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 3 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff DIFF-MARKED Review Copy —— (OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53)) (NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18)) 2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.2 Linearized : No Page Count : 268 Create Date : 2005:04:12 14:53:55 Producer : Acrobat Distiller Command 3.01 for AIX 4.1.1 and later (RS6000) Creator : XyEnterprise XPP 7.2C.1 Patch #8 Title : No Job NameEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools